JP6704692B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine for driving a game ball into a game area and rolling down the game ball hit in the game area to play a game.

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine (for example, a so-called pachinko machine) is widely known in which a game ball is driven toward a game area and the game ball that is driven in the game area is rolled down to perform a game. On a game board of such a gaming machine, a winning detection sensor for detecting a winning of a game ball to a winning opening (starting opening, large winning opening, ordinary winning opening, etc.), and an illegal game action on the gaming board are detected. A large number of detection sensors such as a sensor (for example, a vibration detection sensor or a magnetic detection sensor) are provided (for example, Patent Document 1) .
In a gaming machine, there is a situation in which the detection sensor is set at a plurality of locations (for example, respectively arranged near a starting opening, a winning opening, a special winning opening, an out opening, etc.) in the gaming area. Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor (for example, the transistor of the panel relay board) is performed by various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected.

JP, 2009-165673, A

By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change in the resistance value due to the secular change of the used electrical parts (for example, the connector or the detection sensor) and the wiring pattern, or the length of the wiring, which is different from the design value. As a result, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value changes even when the type of the detection sensor, the location of the detection sensor, or the length of the wiring (harness) is changed due to the specification change during development. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes.
If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a situation, the current flowing through the detection sensor may be different from the original designed value. That is, the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor and generalizing a detection circuit .

A plurality of abnormality detection sensor units arranged on the game board,
Before SL abnormality detection sensor unit are connected by a connector member, in the gaming machine provided with a relay board that transmits a signal from the abnormality detection sensor unit to the main control board,
The relay board includes a sensor signal input section and a detection circuit section,
The sensor signal input unit includes a voltage output unit and a voltage raising unit formed of a resistance element without using a Zener diode connected to the voltage output unit,
A plurality of the sensor signal input units are electrically connected to the detection circuit unit,
The voltage output unit outputs a first voltage when the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a voltage lower than the first voltage when the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output a second voltage that is
The detection circuit unit, switching on and off of the output of the detection signal in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit,
The abnormality detection sensor unit and the voltage output unit of the sensor signal input unit are electrically connected via the connector member,
The voltage raising unit is also low at constant-pressure than higher the first voltage than said second voltage due to contact resistance is applied to occur to the connector member, said with respect to the sense circuit unit to avoid effects of Tokoro constant-voltage, which is avoided action by the predetermined voltage so that a drop-in replacement should not be cut output of the detection signal of the detection circuit unit,
The detection circuit unit,
When the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the first state, the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the first voltage to turn on the output of the detection signal,
When the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the second state, the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the second voltage that is lower than the first voltage, and the detection signal is output. Off,
The voltage output portion due to contact resistance generated the connector member, even when outputting the plant constant-voltage lower than the high of the first voltage than the second voltage, said detection signal Turn off the output of
When the connector member connected to the abnormality detection sensor unit is broken, and the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the first voltage and the output of the detection signal is turned on, the notification means causes the game. The effect display device provided on the panel gives a notification.

According to the present invention, erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor can be prevented. Further, the detection circuit section can be generalized. Therefore, it becomes possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 6A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the lower left rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in the cross-sectional view of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a sphere guiding part, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a sphere guiding part different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a different sphere guiding portion is provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48(b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production|operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a part of the operation button cut away to hide a portion to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be hidden by the first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of the operation button has extended. . 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that in the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 46B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is the explanatory view which saw the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button has extended. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the HH line in FIG.64(b). 64A is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production|operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production|operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the second base unit of the second production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production|operation operation unit from the direction which the center axis of the operation button has extended in the state which faced forward. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is seen the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the front, (c) is the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the MM line in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 88 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the payment unit for every main components and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a dispensing device, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full-ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening/closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 117, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 117, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the game panel of the form different from Drawing 117 from the front with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 121 from back. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 129. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input/output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 143 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 143 to the peripheral control board. FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 146. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 149. FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 150. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pay-out ball gaze operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze operation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of the payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from the CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the game machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure when the some sensor signal input part respectively connected to each of a some magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a figure which shows the pseudo continuous production pattern table selected by the peripheral control board 1510. (A) is a deviation variation pattern table showing an example of variation patterns at the time of deviation. (B) is a big hit variation pattern table showing an example of the variation pattern at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows pseudo continuous symbol 1. It is a figure which shows pseudo continuous symbol 2. It is a figure which shows pseudo continuous symbol 3. It is a figure which shows the 1st pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table selected when promotion aspiration and pseudo-relational symbol promotion are not performed. It is a diagram showing a second pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table selected when the pseudo-relational symbol promotion is executed without the promotion of promotion being executed. It is a figure which shows the 3rd pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table selected when both promotion promotion effect|action and pseudo continuous symbol promotion are performed. It is a figure showing an example of a series of pseudo continuous productions performed when it is decided to perform pseudo continuous productions. It is a figure showing an example of a series of pseudo continuous productions performed when it is decided to perform pseudo continuous productions. It is a figure showing an example of a series of pseudo continuous productions performed when it is decided to perform pseudo continuous productions. It is a figure showing an example of a series of pseudo continuous productions performed when it is decided to perform pseudo continuous productions. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of a series of pseudo continuous productions. It is a figure which shows the 4th pseudo continuous production pattern table selected when promotion incitement production and pseudo continuous symbol promotion are not performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of pseudo continuous production performed when the 4th suspicious maintenance continuous symbol display pattern table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of pseudo continuous production performed when the 4th suspicious maintenance continuous symbol display pattern table is selected. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a distribution winning opening unit. It is a figure showing a series of flows which suggest the expectation degree concerning the special symbol which is changing by the production at the time of reservation satisfaction. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the example of a series of flow of the production|presentation 2 at the time of fulfillment performed while the 1st special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is changing, and (f) is a lottery result. It is a figure showing an example of a series of flows of production 2 at the time of fulfillment performed while a first special design which is off is changing. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the example of a series of flow of the production|presentation 2 at the time of fulfillment performed while the 2nd special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is fluctuating, (d)-(f) is FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a series of flows of the effect 2 at the time of fulfillment, which is executed while the second special symbol having a missed lottery result is changing. (A) is a diagram showing a pattern table of the effect on hold fulfillment executed when the special symbol in change is the first special symbol and the lottery result is a big hit, and (B) is in change. It is a figure which shows the pattern table of the production at the time of reservation fulfillment performed when a special symbol is the first special symbol and a lottery result is a miss. (A) is a figure which shows the pattern table of the holding-satisfaction time effect executed when the special symbol in change is the second special symbol and the lottery result is a big hit, and (B) is in change. It is a figure which shows the pattern table of production at the time of reservation satisfaction performed when a special design is the second special design and a lottery result is a miss. It is a figure showing an example of a series of flows in story-type reservation fulfillment production. It is a figure which shows the effect|action on hold fulfillment time which can be performed, and the effect|action on hold satisfaction time which is not performed by the remaining time of a special symbol change. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of flows in the production|production including the pre-holding fulfillment production performed immediately before seven storages are accumulated, just before the storage is filled. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of flows in the production|generation including the holding|maintenance reduction time production performed when the predetermined number of storage|holding storages decreased from the state with which storage|storage storages were full.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-back direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door-frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 which is attached to the lower part of the front surface on the lower side, and the player which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and which is changed by the game ball being driven into the game area 5a. A door operation left side unit 530, which is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participation type effect. And a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front surface on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 attached to the lower part of the front of the game board 5 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the vehicle.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are paid one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 for paying out and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 in accordance with the stored state of the game balls. The upper full sphere path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full sphere path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 A normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and a game ball that is discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e is guided forward and the door frame 3 is filled from the front end. And a lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tank receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launching device 680. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face the same surface. Has been.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically pass through and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions on the left and right ends that are closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction. Inside the engagement notch 21, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on a side surface that is an outer side in the left-right direction from a position rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior are provided. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to improve the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rearward extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, so that strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 toward the center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is.
Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the concave portion 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically extending near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d.
Further, in the state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upright from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame side upper hinge The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and becomes gradually narrower, it rolls to the rear side with a wider interval and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided in front and back with a space therebetween. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively.
Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower left fixing member 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging cutout portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surface of the lower frame member 20, respectively. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and the abutment is made on the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side surface is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axially supported state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the elastic portion 66c caused by creeping and prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension 62.

Even if the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate in shape, the front end of the lock member 66 is directed to the outside of the front extension 62 at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is brought into a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66a, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c.
As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the incorrect tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by using a gap between the main body frame 4 and the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangle (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, A door frame 3 and a body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate through the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, are locked. An opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for operating, a ball feeding unit 250 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball launching device 680 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270, which receives the game balls that have been fired by the player and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322, is provided.

Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end of the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Or a ball lending/returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball to the lower side of the dish unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 (above the dish unit 320). The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 is provided with a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 with respect to the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 with light emission decoration.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 such that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (rotatable by a hinge). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 detachably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to be rotatable. And a glass unit mounting member 170 for

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open/close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a substantially quadrangular inner peripheral shape in a front view that extends vertically. The through-hole 111 has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference moves up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side slightly projects forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Of the cylinder lock 211, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The through hole 116 for the lower plate and the front and rear of the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 that extends along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and extends left and right, and a middle reinforcing member that extends under the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 that extends left and right. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement that is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 134 and the locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate.
The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and vertically separated from each other, and a pair of the door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped flange member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame is installed. And a lock spring 144 for urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape whose side view is open to the front. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the collar member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. .

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by the operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.
Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIG. 21 and FIG. 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped attachment piece (not shown) extended upward from the rear end of a horizontally extended flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the projecting portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projecting portion 172 becomes glass. When the glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. .. From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where it projects downward from the base 171, the projecting portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the projection 172 does not entirely rotate so as to project upward from the base 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is attached to the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. ..

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

Since the axis line of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the tubular portion The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and the left and right spaced apart. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward from the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. A rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protruding piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball (the game ball shot by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not prevent the player from hitting the game ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thus, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The open/close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the corresponding key is a clockwise key or a counterclockwise key when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side when viewed from the front side of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

In the state where the open/close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. By operating the pull-out button 327, the lower plate can be pulled out.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a and having an open rear, and a box having a rear end closed and a front open. The rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover. A ball removing member 253 having a partition portion 253a that is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the two parts 251 and that partitions the entrance 251a and the ball removing port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251; , The game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can be rotated around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and the ball feed solenoid 255 that rotates the ball feed member 254 are provided.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 250, the ball feeding member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and the ball removing member 253 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 and the ball feeding member 254 of the ball feeding member 254. Ball feeding solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side.

The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball removing port 251b in a front view. An operating rod 253c of a ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the end side from the rear side.

The ball removing member 253 partitions the space between the entrance 251a and the ball removing opening 251b below the entrance 251a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 253a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partitioning portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A pivot rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 253b, and a side of the pivot rod 253b below the operating rod 253c. The partition portion 253a is provided with a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removing button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a, which is fan-shaped in plan view around a rotation axis extending toward the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 and extending vertically, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It has a sphere holding portion 254b which is recessed in an arc shape toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c which extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. The ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates about the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 254c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation, by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking section 254a faces the partition section 253a and at the same time the ball holding section 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding section 254b faces the partition section 253a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied to the ball launching device 680 from the hitting ball supply port 252a, and at the same time, the game ball has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking section 254a blocks the movement to the ball holding section 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) side and remains on the partition section 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 254b faces the partition part 253a, and the end of the ball holding part 254b on the side of the rod part 254c closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding solenoid 255, which causes the tip to swing vertically, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256, which swings vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending vertically. The ball feed crank 257 includes an engaging portion 257a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extends upward from the shaft portion 257b. A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256, which is swung by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 moving forward and backward, by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to move the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. In addition, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located at. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254. The game ball received by can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

Further, the rotatably supported ball-stripping member 253 of the ball-sending unit 250 receives a moment to rotate counterclockwise in a front view by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. Since the operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that operates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, its rotation is restricted, and therefore the ball removing member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released by the partition 253a. To be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removing guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b in which the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball punching member 253 abuts is formed, since it is biased upward by the upper dish ball pulling spring 327c, the upper part of the partition portion 253a is Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center for a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. A lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip ends (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 260 such that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launching device 680 and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When an illegal act such as operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first starting opening 2002, etc., is illegal due to the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launching device 680. After inserting the string attached to the game ball between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shape narrowed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 37(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. And 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball that connects the normal guide path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320. The passage 273 and a full-ball receiving port 274 that is open to the rear on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 273 when viewed from the front and can communicate with the full-tank guiding path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And are equipped with.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (fal ball) and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to the lower plate ball supply port 323c and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full ball receiving port 274, the foul ball receiving port 275, and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide space, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 for biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

In the foul cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls causes the upper end of the movable piece 278 to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, so when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects a full tank, the further dispensing of game balls is stopped, and This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge the lower plate 322 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through-ball passage 273, and the guide passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 281 with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can contact (see FIG. 112). The door opening/closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening/closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 40(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to provide an outer periphery. A handle base 301 and an inner member having a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 308 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biasing in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip end side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside in a front view. The projecting button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 so that the proximal end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311 is detected. The single button operation sensor 312 is provided.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 while the three groove portions 301c are aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 is in a state in which the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 305) and four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the handle return spring 308 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 302e. Locking projection 302f.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the most protruding portion of the handle 302 from the outer peripheral surface is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the most projecting portion bulges so as to bulge outward, and the side surface in the opposite direction around the opposite direction curves inward. Thus, it is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

The third protrusion 302c has a portion of the handle 302 which is most protruded from the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is separated from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, It projects slightly higher. The side surfaces on both sides of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially straight line, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulge forward and project rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view, and faces the outer side (open side), so that the handle mounting member 180 is fixed. The handle unit 300 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , A game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. I can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311 and the firing control unit (illustration of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. With this, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. With strength, the game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a.

Further, the handle unit 300 is provided with four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. When the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hitting"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. Since the positions are substantially the same, the handle 302 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 302 by using the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as seen from the front left. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the lower left rear side. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged part of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is mounted on the plate-shaped plate unit base 323 that is attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side of the center in the left and right bulges greatly forward. An upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate body 325 forming a lower plate 322 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower front portion of the plate unit base 323 and bulges significantly forward. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 includes an upper plate ball removing button 327 attached to the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be pressed from above in a front view right side, and a front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328. And the ball lending/returning display portion 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the dish front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper tray 321. An effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332, and a lower plate ball removal button 333 that is attached to the front of the lower plate 322 so as to project from the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 to the front and can be pressed from the front. I have it.

[3-3a. Plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front bulges largely to the front and opens upward. Has been done. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) is bulged to the front most about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 321 has a front end retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and a guide passage portion 321a is formed whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Underneath (see FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 323 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper plate. It can be supplied to the ball delivery port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower downward in the guide passage portion 321a having a narrow depth in the front-rear direction. That is, part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls. The upper plate 321 (upper plate body 324) projects into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal fitting 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and by contacting (rolling) the game ball, it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls, and is attached to the plate unit cover 326 and a lower plate ball removal hole 322a that vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a to allow the game balls to be discharged. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the produced effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the front right corner is recessed rearward in an arc shape.

The lower tray 322 includes a lower tray body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower tray cover portion 326k that covers the lower tray body 325 from the left end side thereof, and the lower tray body 325 open. The tray unit base 323 is closed at the rear side, and the lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a. The cover 326 is exposed to the outside from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side and the upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side. Is formed in a shape that is a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, etc., the lower plate body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side and rear side are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower dish ball removal hole 322a that penetrates vertically in a size as large as possible. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle that extends left and right, and a front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side, an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides that extend obliquely are curved backward. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 325a) is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b in front view corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower dish cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower dish body 325. As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, etc., the lower dish cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340 a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325 b of the lower tray body 325, and an upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340 a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end of the right side. The lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, and the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower tray cover portion 326k of the tray unit cover 326. In this lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion of the rear side thereof that extends obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in a front view of a portion extending to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is viewed in a front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half goes around behind the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 includes a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower tray opening 326d of a tray unit cover 326, which will be described later. The lower plate second area A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area), and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has a half or more of a storage region (corresponding to the storage area in plan view, which is a combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) capable of storing the game balls, It is located behind the effect operation unit 400. Note that, in FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 which is on the rear side such as the side. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower dish opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be hollowed toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) which is bulged forward. The storage volume of the game balls is formed to be larger than the area visible from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second area A2 is larger than the lower plate first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), it is possible to store more game balls in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

As for the lower tray 322, the right half of the lower tray body 325 in the left-right direction (lower tray second area A2) is, as shown in FIG. ) Inside, and the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the part of the lower plate body 325 which projects into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. This lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322 a of the lower dish 322 is openably and closably closed by a lid member 334 that operates by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower part of the plate unit 320 from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a.

The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is arranged in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid in which the front side is narrowed on the front side of a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the bottom surface is the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, with the lid member 334 opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a being opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply is performed. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b forming the standing wall on the right side of the lower tray 322. The standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is obliquely curved with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, it is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without going to a region on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

In this way, since the lower dish 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In the state where is opened, without entering the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, immediately from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the player does not see the game balls circulating on the lower dish 322, and thus is dispensed from the upper dish 321 and the dispensing device 830. It is possible to give an illusion that the game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box, and to make it difficult for the game balls to pass through the lower plate 322, so that the player can play the game (game ball driving operation). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by devoting itself to (or directing images).

Further, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower tray 322 is provided. Even if the game ball supplied inside is jumped up in the lower plate 322 and jumped up, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j side from within the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible that the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

Further, since the lower plate 322 has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, when the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. You can Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 come into contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damage them. Can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Thereby, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper bowl 321, the gaming ball of the upper bowl 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is possible to further exert the above-described operational effects. Simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 that form the lower plate 322 are separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, but from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 to the lower tray cover 340. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, although an example in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a is shown, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 does not overlap the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is provided with the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is shown, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be used as the lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrating holes through which game balls cannot pass. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. In addition, you may make it arrange|position the light-emitting body, such as LED, in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through the fence-shaped or net-shaped gap of the lower dish 322 (light emission decoration). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) that are separately formed. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by integrating these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are Integrated plate, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 Integrated with the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Sphere guiding part of lower plate]
In the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320, an embodiment provided with a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46(b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from that in (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with a different ball guide part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46(a), the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a. It is provided with a pair of sphere guiding portions 322c which are spaced apart from each other on the right and left sides. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending forward and backward in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the bottom plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is guided to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without getting over the ball guiding part 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball on the rear side (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

As described above, since the lower dish 322 of this example includes the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

In the example of FIG. 46(a), a rail-shaped one is shown as the ball guiding portion 322c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46(b), the game ball discharged right obliquely forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the wall portion on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. , Is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer portion 322d at the portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the lower plate 322 of this example, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the front right is reflected by the buffer portion 322d toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. To be done. At this time, the game ball abuts on the buffer 322d and is reflected, so that the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has a rear side on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation unit 400 in the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are arranged on the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 and the like) and are not visible from the front.

In this way, the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, so that even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls or the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that it seems that the game balls are also directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make an illusion that the player does not feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46(c), the lower plate 322c has a bottom plate (bottom wall portion 325a) on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a interposed therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e which projects upward from and reflects the game ball which has jumped over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a side. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise during reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (main body standing wall part 325b).

In this lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear of the right side of the opening portion 326d (on the rear side of the cover operation wall 400 such as the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is located and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the ball tray 322c and the buffer 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. As a result, the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
FIG. 47(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47(b) schematically shows a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, Comprising: (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47(a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the installation space 326j (the effect operation unit 400 or the second effect operation unit 400A) in which the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is housed, more than the main body section 325A. It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension section 325B has a relief section 322b formed at the front right corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

Next, in the example of FIG. 47(b) and FIG. 47(c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not project rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus the example of FIG. The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) forms a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and a main body 325A. It is attached to the right side of the section 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and is provided with a second extension section 325C larger than the first extension section 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger game ball storage area than the first extension portion 325B. Further, a lower tray cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension section 325C is attached to the lower tray 322 (see FIG. 47(c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage area of the game balls. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B or the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C in the lower plate body 325 are in a predetermined gap (communication with the mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

As described above, in the above example, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be divisible, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable, so that the gaming balls in the lower plate 322 are The storage area can be increased or decreased as required. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be separable, the projection operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is projected rearward (in the attachment space 326j). An extension unit (first extension unit 325B or second extension unit 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above-described embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first area A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 (lower tray 322) is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the main body portion 325A, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower tray main body 325 is shown, but on the right side of the main body portion 325A, the game ball A flat plate-shaped closing member having no storage region may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322 has been described, but the lower tray cover 340 can be divided in the same manner as the lower tray main body 325, or the first extension unit 325B or the second extension unit. You may make it the shape according to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to a lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 323a extending cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 323a. And a speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward in the lower part to the left from the left-right center in front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, An upper plate ball feed port 323d is provided which penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in a front view, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

Further, the dish unit base 323, a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed opening 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, the lower dish ball supply port 323c extends in a substantially L-shape so as to lower toward the right side surface of the cylindrical front view, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the discharged game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the ball feed guide path 323e in a front view, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball guide path 323f. An opening 323g that penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position between them and that abuts the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and that is operated by the upper bowl ball removing button 327 so that the operation transmitting portion 327a projects rearward. , Are provided. The downstream end of the ball removal guide path 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and a cylindrical rear end of the upper plate passage port for the upper plate of the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270.
Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower dish ball supply port 323c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 (on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Plate unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has a center portion in the left-right direction that bulges forward, a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction, and a production operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the production operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. A plate front upper decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decorative portion 326c formed below the left and right plate front upper decorative portions 326b, respectively. There is.

The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed to have a size in the left-right direction of about 1/3 of the entire width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. Formed at height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front side of the plate front decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape which is slightly bulged forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the. In addition, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end thereof moves upward from the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed such that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward both left and right ends. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

The plate front lower decorative portion 326c has its front surface moved rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The curved surface is formed such that the intermediate portion is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. In addition, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 when assembled in the dish unit 320.

The dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in front view has a handle insertion opening 326f that penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner in front view and into which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front view. A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed in the vicinity of the right corner in the front and rear direction above the handle insertion port 326f, and the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted therethrough.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h covers the upper plate 321. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom plate portion 326i closes the lower side of the dish unit 320. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a vertically penetrating hole at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). The dish unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d in a flat plate shape and includes a lower dish cover 326k that covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k comes into contact with the left end of the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325, and the right end thereof with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removing button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although not shown in detail, the upper dish ball removal button 327 has a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326, so that the rear end side is below the top plate portion 326h. It is mounted rotatably about an axis extending to the. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof at the upper end of a vertically extending ball removal lever. The ball-draining lever is mounted slidably in the vertical direction by a ball-draining base mounted on the front surface of the platen unit base 323 below the upper plate ball-draining button 327.

Then, the ball-draining lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball-pulling button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the upper plate ball-pulling slider 327b which is slidably mounted vertically by the plate unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a that projects rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a extends from the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is biased upward by an upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and the upper plate ball removing spring 327c biases the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever. The upper bowl ball removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper bowl ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper bowl ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper bowl removing slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball discharging port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball discharging guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

It should be noted that when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked and movable. Thereby, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper bowl 321, the gaming ball of the upper bowl 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating his interest by devoting himself to a game (a game ball driving operation, an effect image, etc.). Simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Installed on.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented out (dispensed) in the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed with the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine inserted, the return of the cash or prepaid card after subtracting the rented game balls.

Although illustration is omitted, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or The error code and the like when the ball lending machine fails are displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the drawing, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing rightward of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 which are arranged in the game area 5a in a front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is located below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower dish 322, and protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. By pressing this lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 322 can be discharged below the dish unit 320.

The lower dish ball removing button 333 can be slid forward and backward by a lower dish ball removing base 335 (see FIG. 42(b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 below the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, which is formed at a position below the bottom plate 322 so as to be accommodated in a stepped portion which is recessed upward from below. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower tray ball punching base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a which has the same size as the lower tray ball punching hole 322a and which penetrates vertically in a position directly below the lower tray ball punching hole 322a. .. Although not shown in detail, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a. And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removing base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position to the left of the lower dish ball removing button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removing button 333 is connected to a part between the part of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322 a and the part that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball removing base 335. With this, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (the discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown in the drawing, the lower plate ball removing base 335 holds the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is moved rearwardly, and a lower plate ball removing button. And a lower dish ball pulling spring that urges 333 forward. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved rearward, the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened by the movement, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is maintained in the open state. The game ball in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed rearward, the holding by the holding device is released. When the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released in this state, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward due to the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. This allows the game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) also moves by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. With this, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removing button 327, the lower box 322 can be used for the dollar box. It is possible to discharge the ball, and it is possible to simplify the trouble of removing the ball. Simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and lower plate 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear.
50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48(a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48(b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. And a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter that is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side is bulged forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 that is attached is provided, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend axially toward the center side in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arcuate cross-section at a position on the outer peripheral side and extend in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angle range. A plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer than the center.

Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a rear main body 413a from the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged rearward along the outer circumference of the columnar shape and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape that extends from the front end of the main body 413a to the front and the front end side is along the inner surface of the button lens 411. And an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to the (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction such that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by contacting the front side of the outer peripheral edge with the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 is restricted. By pressing against the front end, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Also, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player side.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and an operation button is attached by a button frame 412 attached to an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 is changed. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button lower part of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front side from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the target area for light-emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed such that its outer shape is in conformity with the front end side of the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that has a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 mounted from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 mounted from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a which penetrates forward and backward on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and three outer peripheral openings 416b are provided, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. Is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and that are mounted to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, three each from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed into a smooth surface without any unevenness, and a plurality of unevenness is formed along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 has the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 allow light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decoration board 422 and an operation button right outside decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side, and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same.
The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are white.

An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to light and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward.

The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically in the central portion, and a blind hole that is open to the front outside the through hole 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button interior decoration member 432 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a and extends in the front and rear in a short tubular shape, The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 which are attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432. The operation button upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 in the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. And a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 that are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three press detection sensors 440 that are respectively attached to 439 and that detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, a production operation unit relay board 441 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a production operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted therethrough. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the upper, lower, left, and right four corners outside the through hole 431a at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 431b have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

More specifically, among the four holding holes 431b, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side is located at the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at the positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the two upper holding holes 431b. ..

In addition, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape between a portion to which the operation button upper decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached on the upper front surface. Is equipped with. With the light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center thereof protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e protruding rearward from the mounting base 431 and mounted to the unit base 431.

An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed into smooth surfaces without unevenness.

The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f are provided in the circumferential direction. , Is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric about the center of the front plate portion 432b. A plurality of second button internal decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion that extends in parallel with the four inner peripheral portions of the opening portion 432c.

The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is not clearly visible due to the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 can be made to emit light by emitting light. By illuminating and decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432, the interior of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by making these LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be made to emit light.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end abutting on the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressing detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 are, on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, another on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 431 as the center. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 is an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, the operation button lower interior decoration board 436, the frame top lens decoration board 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460, and for relaying the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and is between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the frame unit 415 is held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface, and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16:9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer periphery of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the mounting bracket 462 is attached so that the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape contacts the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

In the state in which the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and faces the front from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 461 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the cross sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production|operation operation unit. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a central side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protruding forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (partial shape of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The main body 416 of the frame unit 415 projects forward from a central opening 416a (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by an outlined arrow in FIG. 61, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL will be pressed.

By the way, since the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed in a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When the part of the operation button that is deviated from the center is pressed, the pressing surface is tilted so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moving straight backward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player who is pressing the operation button 410 is provided. Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operation unit attachment of the dish unit cover 326 is attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part in the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side or the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. Since they are arranged in concentric circles, the uneven line of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g intersect, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the second button decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with a depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, whereby the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated.
That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outside decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is positioned between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be excellently light-emitting decorated.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 430 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Performance Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A that is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65(b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64(a). 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64(b). 69(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 69(b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and is transparent on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the effect of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of performing light emission decoration on the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and the second base unit 450 visible through the operation button 410 from the player side. A door frame side second effect display device 460A mounted on the door frame side and capable of displaying an effect image, and a buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front and a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. The relay board cover 516 is attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the front view right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outside decoration board 422, an operation button right outside decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, and the like. And the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 to relay the connection.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) such that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

A specific difference is that, between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the drawing, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-shaped pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing each other and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern Right triangle shape composed of a bottom side facing the center side of the, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom side. And a hypotenuse of a right triangle, a side extending from the center of the bottom of the truss triangle to the center of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle, and a right triangle from the tip of the triangle. And an isosceles triangle shaped pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the oblique side of the pattern.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although illustration is omitted, the triangles forming the first button decoration portion 411a are formed in a polyhedron shape with their respective faces facing different directions. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, and thus the first button decoration portion 411a. In this area, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately, and light passing through this area is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to the irregular refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and has a tubular shape and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the button shaft 452. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 that is inserted into the guide boss portion 413c from the rear side.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed such that its outer shape is in conformity with the front end side of the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. The second effect operation unit 400A can be given vibration.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decoration board 422 and an operation button right outside decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. In the second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and it is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what is done.

The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a rear portion inside the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 protruding from the front surface of the unit base 451. Four columnar button shafts 452 slidably inserted from each other, and an operation button spring that inserts each of the four button shafts 452 and urges the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and that detect three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b protruding rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a in a hemispherical shape, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. When viewed, the through-hole 451c is a substantially rectangular shape that extends vertically and penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth, four holding holes 451d recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front surface to the rear portion in the upper portion of the main body portion 451e and the semicircular shape that is coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front surface to the rear portion in the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. (U-shaped) recessed lower bearing portion 451f, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a and that restrict the rotation of the screen unit 470. And are equipped with.

The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference that are substantially the same size as the board base 421 of the C-shaped decorative board unit 420.
The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without coming into contact with the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A that is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from the rear side.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front, bottom, left and right of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted therein.
A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis thereof. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. The button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, so that the operation button 410 is slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. You can

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d extends counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated by about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. ..

In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c, so that the operation button springs are pressed through the guide boss portions 413c. 410 is biased forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape whose front is open and which extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions that extend in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, after the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474A of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. By being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. Are formed so as to be separated from each other in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by contacting the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to the angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

Although not shown in the drawings, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and the magnets are magnetically attached to the iron plates attached to the stoppers 475b to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. It is difficult for the stopper 475b that has been moved to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the main screen 471 is in the first position with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b facing forward, or the second screen with the sub-screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any one of the position states, and the movement of the screen unit 470 that is about to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration of the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image produced by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 451 as the center. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 mounted rotatably around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounted on the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and on the lower front surface of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

In addition, the door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a rotary drive unit 490 that is rotationally driven to drive the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper portion of the second base unit 450, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and is capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, the projector 500 is attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. And a box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open, and a rotary drive unit 490 on the upper part of the second base unit 450 mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side in a front view. The upper cover 506 is provided with two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and by projecting an effect image from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projection display) so as to be visually recognized by the player.

The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, has a milky white main screen 471, and a translucent main screen 471. The sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, has a milky white color, and has translucency, and protrudes in a column shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) that is transparent and is formed in a relief pattern imitating a predetermined character (skull), and the sub-screen 472 attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decoration substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the main screen 471, and the main screen 471 from the end opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends in a short length.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends of the main screen 471 in the axial direction are decorated so as to be framed by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which its central axis extends (see FIG. 74(b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral edge decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of pyramidal pyramidal irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction and closes the inside of the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a. And a curved screen portion 472b that is curved. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side thereof projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably attached by being inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

The actuating gear member 475 engages with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed to extend outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half the circumference and one end of the gear teeth 475a in the circumferential direction. A stopper 475b and a detection piece 475c protruding outward from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by coming into contact with the pair of rotation regulating portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends of the recess 481a.

Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like this.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed of a transparent member in a relief shape imitating a skull, and since the plate thickness thereof changes intricately, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear side is visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the sub-screen decoration member 476 has a letter "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the plurality of LEDs 477a on the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, by causing the LED 477a to emit light, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can strongly light and decorate the "eye" portion and the "PUSH" portion of the skull.

Further, since the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a emits light. The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and like the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the main body portion of the unit base 451. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state in which the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By mounting on the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably mounted on the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open. And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the front surface of the upper portion of the frame 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface toward the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 when assembled in the second rendering operation unit 400A, and has a screen inside. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The recessed portion 481a recessed in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface side of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in the state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Can be rotatably mounted.

[3-4g-5c. Rotational drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow interior, and a switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear that is engaged with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear, meshes with gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

In the rotary drive unit 490 assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates a production image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b by passing through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as.

The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in the shape of a box with the front open, and has the projector 500 mounted therein and the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. . The rear wall of the projector mounting member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and heat emitted from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 so as to be separated from each other.

Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and are the operating gears of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces the front, and a second position in which the sub screen 472 faces the front. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c from these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and absorbs the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is struck from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable plate-like cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. The buffer base 512 is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right ends of the main body portion 512a in a front view and extend in the front-rear direction. And 512b. The leg pieces 512b of the cushioning base 512 are in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the state assembled to the door frame 3.

In this buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down. Move down to. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface side of the body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a is bent, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the production operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effect of second production operation unit]
The effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production|operation operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button has extended with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75(a) is a sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74(b). FIG. 76(a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is trying to do, and (b) shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77(a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is trying to do, and (b) shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production|operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire height is substantially the same as the height of the portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.
Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit 320, and between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. There is a gap formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. On the other hand, it is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the playing board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is possible in its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It is possible to visually recognize the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the like in the operation button 410 in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. Of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state of the second effect operation unit 400A, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (a part of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

When the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, since the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed in a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When the part of the operation button that is deviated from the center is pressed, the pressing surface is tilted so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is hung. Since only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the attached portion. Since it occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (near the upper portion of the operation button 410) where the player can relatively easily press it, strong vibration is exerted on the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. The buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a where the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512, or the like. It is possible to absorb, it is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the second production operation unit 400A, etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck by a strong force, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second effect operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and prevent damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, as compared with the case of a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) (see FIG. 63).
In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavo-convex combination of the triangles. The inner peripheral surface of the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device are behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis CL direction). A gap is formed between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, and the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (the player side) to move to the outside or the rear side of the screen unit 470. The member of can be made invisible. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the operation button 410 can be made to look good.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the button frame 412. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decoration member 478. The outer part (the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76) is made invisible to the player.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, a portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 (a cross hatch portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ), but not to be seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the inside of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

Further, when the main screen 471 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. Also, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the rotation of the main screen 471, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation is performed. The movement that exceeds the expectation of the player in the button 410 can have a strong impact on the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the sub-screen 472 is in the second position with the front facing forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are driven by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased, It can entertain the player.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A, in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side. To the door frame side second effect display, which is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined within a predetermined width range, and which is arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged in an array, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the rectangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side are overlapped so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and prevent the player from having less interest.

Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of the triangle and the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of the quadrangle are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. When the positions move, the overlapping degree of them changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed to show the moving decoration to the player, and at the same time, the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth can be displayed. Can be shown to entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 are vertically separated from each other, and extend vertically. A decoration with a geometric pattern in which a decoration composed of a plurality of quadrangular pyramids arranged vertically crosses a decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration part 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in an annular shape, and the decoration including a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible for the player to see the geometric pattern decoration overlapping the decoration formed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, since the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed by rotating the screen unit 470, the change of the decoration attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410, or changes the decoration. The change can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having a different switchable screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image that is completely different from the display of the effect image on the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given to entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be spaced apart in the circumferential direction by a rotation angle of 90 degrees about the axis.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the central axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74(a)). When the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75(a)), and is translucent milky white. Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. As a result, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from that, and to surprise the player, and also to let the player pay attention to the main screen 471, and to enjoy the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position with the sub-screen 472 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 has a circular shape. It seems that the sub-screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is positioned in the center (see FIG. 74(b)). In this state, when the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat plate-shaped non-translucent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, an effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at this sub-screen decoration substrate 477. Thus, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75(b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 can be decorated. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made invisible, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made invisible. The entire side can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light in a state where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed to the front, and an effect image (moving image) is forwarded from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the part outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 which is a decoration imitating skull, and the effect image is displayed. The sub-screen decoration member 476 on the inner side of is illuminated and decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machines. It can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, since the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (higher in brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, a partially high effect image which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that can further entertain the player can be displayed.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. With this, since the player can see the decoration with movement and a three-dimensional effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as effect images to the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front side in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) or to the front side. The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the interior of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Also, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outside decoration board 422 in the decoration board unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside of the frame button 415, behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, By making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. It is possible to display the effect image by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and to present the player with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines. , Can give the player a great impact and entertaining.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78(a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) above the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in front view.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side in front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. A decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member, and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decoration cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decoration lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535; And a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located at a substantially vertical center when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. By the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases on the outer side of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflection portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape having a rearward point. The front reflection portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the rectangular lens portion 532b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis line extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions) and travels inside the rectangular lens portion 532b along the front surface thereof from the center side to the outside. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the center side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 in the rectangular lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). Accordingly, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

In the prismatic lens portion 532b, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. As a result, the front surface of the polygonal lens portion 532b of the left unit decoration lens member can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends before and after the depression. In the polyhedral decoration, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative portion is forwarded from the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light radiated to each of them causes a luminous decoration.

The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangle that extends vertically in a front view, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left portion is left. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, and the lower part of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 82C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear.
FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82(a). FIG. 86(a) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 are attached to the left side from the center in the front view of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in a front view and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in the front surface of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is shallow in the front and right directions and is open in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A box-shaped non-translucent right unit left light-shielding member 559, and a light-transmitting light attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically pass through the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and extends in the shape of a rectangular tube that is short in the front-rear direction and is closed in the center in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is a left LED 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and mounted on the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c.
The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame lower right side decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side in front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to house 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the up-down direction, on the right side in front view of the main body portion 553a. The input lens portion 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof becomes higher as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emits light favorably by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit left decoration member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality of (six) side reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface of the body portion 553a (side surface reflection portion 553f), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side to the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 are left. The light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left side, so that the right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric circular arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric circular groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with a more uniform light and shade. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in front view in a short flat plate shape. The portion 556b, the rear wall portion 556b are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right side, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decoration member 557, an input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a main body portion 553a that is substantially the same in outer shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the entire main body portion 556a moves toward the left from the front end side toward the front from the rear end side with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutout portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved spherically. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Accordingly, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

The side surface reflection portion 556f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line that extends radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves leftward when viewed from the front as it moves forward, The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration substrate 552 and incident on the main body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface inside the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and should be reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

The light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 The light that has been reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

In the side surface reflection portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.
The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in a side view.
The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open.
The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in a front view to the left side, and a plurality of notch portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of them corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward through the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets with a pair of the reinforcing portions 559d that are separated from each other in the vertical direction at the same height as the left and right widths and are separated from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light-shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the vertically extending quadrangular front end is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape, to the right when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. Light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the multifaceted decorative portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-faced decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top of the front part, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the up-and-down direction. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes largely in the plate shape forward of the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward of the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be made to emit light and be decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he/she is playing in a private room, and the other players around can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment is not installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. 87(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is a perspective view. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 at the center in the left-right direction, and at the left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and extending in the left-right direction, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like rear opening, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Each of the slits has a plurality of slits 574b (three in each of the left and right) that extend from each other, pass through in the front-rear direction, and are separated from each other in the vertical direction. A unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which are arranged on the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 and are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a, respectively. ing.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576 and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 are closed, and both left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, which are respectively attached to the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration. Top middle left decoration members 581 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front sides of the respective lens members 580 and extending from the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 to the vicinity of the center side end of the opening 574a, respectively. The top middle right decoration member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are open, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and provided with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 are attached to the front side of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 to the rear side of the unit main body 271, respectively. And a pair of light blocking members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay substrate cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit cover so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, are obliquely attached such that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends left and right, and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has, in plan view, a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and a portion that is approximately ½ of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the bottom A trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 to the left and right end portions of the front end of the unit main body 271 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions outside the left and right ends on the front surface to positions outside the front portion. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely with respect to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut away from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

In addition, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward in the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape in a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon to the outer side in the left-right direction. The right side of the pentagon is connected to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon to form a substantially right-angled triangle. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the part of the pentagonal shape on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is arranged such that the front surface thereof is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining the side closer to the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side closer to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 has a straight portion that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in the arc portion 578b is larger than the height in the up-down direction. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is decreased in the arc portion 578b so as to decrease toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b having a plurality of concavo-convex portions. Is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

In this way, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are juxtaposed left and right.

The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in a row on the left and right.

The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 579a in the state where the top middle left decoration member 581 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the opening 574a on the right side in the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached so as to fill up between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front side near the center is the top right. The decoration lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decoration board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 to be located via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The board base 585 has a side wall that is substantially square in a side view and has sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is a quadrangle in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle is taken as a hypotenuse, and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall.The upper wall of the right-angled triangle is connected to the upper side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. The board base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is a state where the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570 and the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570 so that the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 that is attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction are formed when the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, with the plurality of LEDs 587a facing forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571.
The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to give the illusion of the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative members 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided, and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from each other, the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The function and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the front and rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (a second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (the part below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude significantly forward, and thus the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously emphasized to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, so that the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a large diameter which is substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed favorably even from the front side, and the operation button 410 with good operability can further enhance the effect using the operation button 410.

Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations in accordance with the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is increased. It is possible to make a tactile sense that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c from which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a arranged in front of (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 and the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to depress the player by devoting his/her attention to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

Further, in the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is raised. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected by the wall portion on the right side. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his/her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass sound from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes largely forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give an illusion of being alive, and to let other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely projects to the front, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a line in a game hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a straight center line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 is not the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570. The front surface on both the left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, It is possible to draw a strong attention to the middle decoration member 576.

By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other in the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of them has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration on the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous, and a sophisticated feeling of decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the left-right center of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the left-right center. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are attached rotatably, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view. .

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 700 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side in a front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94. This main body frame base 600 penetrates in the front and rear in a range of a height of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. A game board placing portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which project upward from the center of the game board placing portion 602 in the left-right direction. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 which penetrates the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear penetrating front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front view, and the door of the substrate unit 900. A connection opening 606 for exposing the frame relay board 911 to the front and a circular shape for penetrating the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front through the front and rear sides on the lower left side in a front view of the game board placing section 602. And a speaker opening 607.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends backward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a plate shape, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions on the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is attached to the upper hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view. , A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Body frame side upper hinge member and body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view to pivotally support the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) axially supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. Hinge main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate member is bent upward in an L shape, and a lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side. A restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body 643. The main body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion. The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and downward. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

This reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower tray 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 projecting forward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and protruding forward in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the lock of either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 99(a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99(b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 101A is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in (a). Further, FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is.

FIG. 106(a) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106(b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 107(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108(a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 111(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is opened. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from the island facility of a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. Inside the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) hanging swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. The payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And are equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the lower side, and according to the stored state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Ordinary guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full tank guideway 862 and the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 that guide to the full tank receiving port 274 according to opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, And a lower full ball path unit 860 having a.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends of the front and rear cases 821 and 822 that penetrate the partition plate 823. An attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the pair of movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guide entrance 821a that is open in the upper portion of the right side surface so that the game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide exit that is open in the left side of the center of the bottom surface so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821e in the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide exit that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the horizontal direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detecting portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detecting portion 822e in the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the rear case 822 is assembled to the ball guiding unit 820, the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a detection piece 825f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. And a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The guide passage 821c (detection portion 821e) is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move to the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates the shaft member 824 at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a in the front-rear direction, and the movable piece 826a. An extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, the extending portion 826c is connected to the movable piece 826a, and extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper part of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a detection piece 826f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. And a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is located immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is projected into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction projecting into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member rear 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f at the rear of the movable piece member 826 is not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a state where the game balls are lined up in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. You can

Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d is movable above the detection parts 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the vibration sandwiches or intrudes between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dust, dust, etc. can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a, 826a can be favorably rotated by its own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by the single out-of-ball detection sensor 827, when there is no game sphere in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front The movable piece 825a, 826a of 825 or the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated so as to project into the guide passages 821c, 822c, and the detection pieces 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. It Therefore, it is possible to detect the out-of-ball of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be promptly replenished, and the time for which the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing and attaching metal screws as weights to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight are reduced. With the above, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and the walls, so that their own weight, etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

In this way, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the lower end side of which is projected into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. The lower ends of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall, so that the self-weight, etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to rotate satisfactorily and prevent the occurrence of a defect such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to be attached, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 are frequently rotated, the weight is The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. . In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the labor of attaching the weight can be simplified. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, in the guide passages 821c, 822c, since the movable pieces 825a, 826a are provided with the introduction portions 821d, 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a, 826a, on the upstream side of the portion projecting inward. Since the game ball contacts the movable pieces 825a and 826a by flowing the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that are invaded. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece member 826 can be rotated favorably.

Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated favorably, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. In addition, even if the gaming balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that it is possible to quickly The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is opened in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is open near the right end of the bottom surface when viewed from the front, a payout passage 831d that allows the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b to communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. And a box-like opening with the front side open, a payout opening 832a in the center of the top surface in the left-right direction so that game balls can pass, and a payout in the bottom surface that allows game balls to pass near the left end in front view An outlet 832b, a ball removal outlet 832c that is open near the right end in the front view on the bottom surface so that game balls can pass through, a payout passage 832d that communicates the payout opening 832a and the payout exit 832b, and payouts. A rear box 832 having a ball-removing passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-removing outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow, is provided.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and a rotation shaft which is attached inside the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably pierced so that the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 having an end penetrating the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, and a rotatably mounted penetrating shaft member 838, and dispensing passages 831d and 832d for the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A payout blade 839 that is disposed inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837; and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832 are mounted between the payout vane 839 and the payout passage 831d, 832d and the payout passage 831d, 832d. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a branching point, and a ball-removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. The box 832 is provided with a ball-pulling lever 844 that is attached so as to be slidable up and down on the right side of the front view and that makes the ball-pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 of the overall height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located right above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about ¼ of the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is disposed in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 831d that extends obliquely from the delivery opening 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed in an upper part of the right side surface in front view, and a guide shelf 831f projecting rearward as it goes downward in a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 831b in the dispensing passage 831d. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout inlet 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 of the overall height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the rear box 832 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about ¼ from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is arranged in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball-removing passage 832e further extends a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends obliquely from the payout opening 832a to the lower right, and is about 1/3 the height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and detected.

The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has an unevenness formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and is connectable to the payout blade 839. .

The payout vane 839 extends in the front-rear cylindrical shape and has a base tubular portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) of the front blades 839b and the rear end of the base tubular portion 839a protrude in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that is protruded in a tubular shape from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided with three at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered with respect to each other. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e capable of storing only one game ball is formed.

Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, a diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2)/2] from the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can.
In other words, it is possible to accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly stored between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball storage portion 839e).

In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively.
Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion that is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer circumference of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

As a result, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game balls flowing down onto the payout blade 839 come into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. Therefore, it cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of /7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game ball while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game balls per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and forward and backward in a plate shape, and a lower portion is bent to be formed in a character shape in a front view, and a main body portion 843a extends forward and backward in a tubular shape at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a, which is bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

In the state in which the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end is configured to dispense the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a portion that obliquely extends from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view that is slightly above the portion that bends downward. Installed on.

In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 105(a)).

In this normal state, in the body portion 843a of the ball-stripping movable piece 843 that is bent in a dogleg shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is the lower left in front view. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is doing.

In the normal state, the ball-stripping movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that the center of gravity of the ball-shedding movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front is exerted by it, since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. It should be noted that the ball-removable movable piece 843 must be rotated counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a comes into contact with the left side of the member forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105(b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e, 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout openings 831a, 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d, 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, flow through the opened ball removing passages 831e, 832e, and are discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c, 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with the weight attaching portion 843d, the weight including the metal screw is screwed into the weight attaching portion 843d so as to slide the ball removing lever 844 upward. When the regulation of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

Also, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, or the like that is sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 is frequently rotated, the weight is removed by the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust may be attached to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843, so the ball-removing movable piece 843 removes the ball-removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removal work can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper tank ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass in a left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that projects upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. And a partition 850f partitioning the lower part inside 850c into right and left.

Further, the upper full ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g for guiding the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. This upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view, and opens downward. Further, the upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

In the upper full-ball path unit 850 assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball extracting port 850b is provided. Are located immediately below the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball removing guiding path 865 is opened immediately above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In the state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and further, the normal guiding path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c pass the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower tray 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 861. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides them from the front end to the full tank receiver port 274 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens/closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening/closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full guide path 862. A closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening of the same in a direction to close the opening.

In addition, the lower tank full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball exit port 850h of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. It is provided with a lower ball guideway 865 for discharging to

In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 have rear ends open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and is rotated clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball.
The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The taxiway opening/closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and can close the front end opening of the taxiway path 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end portion of the extending portion 863d and can come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 does not need to seal the openings, and it suffices that the game ball cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centering on the base 863a in a front view, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. is doing.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is urged in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

In the lower full ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 273, a full ball receptacle 274, and a door opening/closing member in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). The guideway opening/closing door 863 has no contact with the actuating projection 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening/closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state of being in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill out of the path 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guide path opening/closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in front view. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111(b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are open, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are made different by vertically changing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 by rotating the guide path opening/closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening/closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening/closing mechanism for the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is filled with the game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls, and it becomes impossible to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable balls 278 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

The stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, and the upper spherical storage path 850c of the upper full ball ball path unit 850 that can be filled in the above state. When the game sphere is paid out, the payout of the game sphere by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and entertain.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board mounted on the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. 117 is a front view of the game board without the front and back units, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is the game board of FIG. 117. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a part of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100. Further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front panel 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the gaming area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary draw, and a first special that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game balls to be accepted in either case according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004, which are attached to the substantially center of the game area 5a, are provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, which is opened in the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes: the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, which extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1011 matches the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portions 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the unit 860 are arranged to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, FIGS. 118 and 119, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113, which are circular holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 that are arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrate the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , Are provided. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1115 having recessed front sides at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and has a holding step portion 1121 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1110 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1110 relatively expands or contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front side of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115.
The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110.
The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap having a size such that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side). By engaging the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 with the engaging step portions 1115 of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 has the same width as the outlet 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The cutouts 1127 match the cutouts 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutouts 1011 and 1127 penetrate the cutouts 1011 and 1127 of the lower full ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 and the front constituent member 1000 can be mounted together. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a rectangular insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout portion 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that of FIG. 117 as viewed from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the above-mentioned game panel 1100.

The game panel 1150 is formed so that its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates laterally in the front-rear direction to the left side in the front view of the lower end and is opened downward and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and a vertical direction above the notch 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that penetrate through the positioning protrusions 1009 at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. The fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000 and the gaming panel with the front constituent member 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 120). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 120, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result obtained by passing a game ball to the gate portion 2003. Ordinary symbol display 1402 consisting of, the normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holding related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 that consists of eight LEDs that display the result of the first special lottery, and the first special hold that consists of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2002. Number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the second start opening 2004, and the second start opening 2004 When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the second special hold number indicator 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game balls A round indicator 1407, which is composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening/closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds), is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 116. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves that are opened to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the back box 3010 from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface.

In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the game ball can be accepted, and a special winning opening 2005 is provided.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.
The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate unit 2003 to the right in front view. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004 are provided.

The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1126 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the special winning opening 2005 allows a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly downward from the vertical center in the upper left of the side unit lower 2200 in the front view in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). Can be guided to the left-right center).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, slightly above the center in front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units and the like provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. It is not possible to break in.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so as to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball emitted from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a front opening, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a back side of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. And a box-shaped production drive board box 3042 which is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the production drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 mounted on the front end in the back box 3010 at the upper side from the vertical center on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is opened in the front and penetrates the back wall in a square shape, and a flat plate frame-shaped that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d that is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the rear view and the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear side so as to be slidable up and down.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 toward the left side in front view as compared with the highest part, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open special winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the side unit upper 2300 pulls the game ball toward the center in the left-right direction, and the side unit lower 2200 includes the general winning opening 2001 and the first winning hole. There is a possibility of being accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, the area in which the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided flows down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the ordinary draw is "normal win", the second starting opening 2004 is a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), it is in the open state, and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, "big hit", " A lottery of the special lottery results for generating "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change hit", "time reduction hit", etc.) is performed. Then, the special lottery result selected by lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are selected by the game balls being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time short hit”, “probability change time not hit”, and the like.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game balls are received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls from the payout device 830 are received by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Are dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls when the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game balls, a large amount of the game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, if any of the conditions is satisfied, a predetermined opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable closed state Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, if "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and if "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change"), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are received from the start of the special drawing until the result of the special drawing is suggested. (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a varying manner by varying each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows each including a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each of the symbol rows is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss", after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs in accordance with the special lottery result selected by lottery.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center accessory 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect. By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back inside movable effect unit 3400, the back below movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a move effect, a display effect, etc., and a game depending on various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. , The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

Also, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention, and The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 respectively correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. ..

Further, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 and the sub-screen decoration board in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 respectively correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Peripheral decoration portion 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decoration full of decorativeness with no sense of perspective, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having a high price can be obtained.

Further, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) is supported so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) approach or leave, Due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap the in-button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player, and the player can be changed. It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, which is the opposite side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the button lens 411 becomes the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the player to the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are seen. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. Even when the player's eyes do not move, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). Since the crossing manner (overlap state) with and changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side where the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 is not provided. Through, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a can be obtained. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 is formed. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. It is possible to surely bring out the perspective of decoration by means of, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g stand out. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g of By the decoration, the player's line of sight or interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Further, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477). When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) with light emission, and further, the button lens 411 can also emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button top The interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), while the first button decoration portion 411a is used for the second button interior decoration. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button interior decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly illuminated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emitted, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. When the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, the perspective is further emphasized. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can show the decoration to the player and can attract the player's interest strongly can be provided.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame) It is possible to widen the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside and make the size as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 at a portion outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be operated. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in decorativeness, has a good appearance, and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly, when the player hits the button lens 411 to impact on a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Compared to the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed in the entire button lens 411, it is possible to make the button lens 411 hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted, causing some players to feel annoyed and less entertaining, and to damage the button lens 411. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advance and retreat) when operated by a player in a circular shape of approximately 15 cm that is within a range of -30 cm, and an operation button interior decoration that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) having the operation buttons 410 as large as possible can be seen at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball is conspicuous, so that at a glance to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized to be different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423, which are provided with the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration section 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and the second LEDs 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 emit light. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 for partitioning the decorative portion 411b, a main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and an inner extending portion 413f for partitioning the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the central side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 and the second LED 422b by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently illuminated and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking luminous effect can be performed. Further, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other are appropriately combined with lights, lights, blinks, brightness, colors, and the like to perform light emission effects in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 emit light and the second LED 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 emit light are combined into one operation button left outside decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided for 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently supplied. The second button decoration portion 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly light-emitted, it is possible to improve the appearance of the second button decoration portion 411b and the light emission decoration of the frame side lens 417, and attract the player's attention. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outside decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves back and forth. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken, so that the operation button 410 is moved (operated) and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are moved. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are passed through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is changed to the second button decoration portion 411b. Are decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b are appropriately made to emit light so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen rearward. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-embellished in various patterns as described above. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second) It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By performing the operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained in the player participation type production and entertained.

Further, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-translucent main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f capable of emitting light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second portion of the operation button 410 The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged rearward because the center side becomes brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitted in a good state, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can be completely partitioned from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end portions (rear end portions) of the inner tubular portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner tubular portion 416d with respect to the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to surely block light by the inner tubular portion 416d, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are configured to extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b. The space between the center of the button lens 411 and the center of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, in the end portion (rear end portion) on the side close to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 in the main body portion 413a, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are Since the light also extends rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive at the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light can be completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. You can Therefore, the second LED decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). The member outside the effect display device 460A and the rear side (back side) can be made invisible by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. In addition, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect) with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) become relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) less visible. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a shape extending in an arc shape.
Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which light gurgles around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect in which the light is converged from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various light emission effects, and to make the player enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 and the upper plate 321 used for the game is displayed. Along with the installation, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 so that the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided with a predetermined space in the rear. The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a part of the lower plate body 325 corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game balls is attached by extending the region corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate body 325, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate are seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. However, it is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance and can attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 portion of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward, and the mounting space 326j extends to the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered by the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls to the space of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. Since it is provided with, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable by the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 bounce in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it is possible to reliably prevent the mounting space 326j from entering the remaining space side, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate body 325, the player can operate the lower plate first area A1 side of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate opening portion). When the user puts his/her hand into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), etc., and let the player play in a safe state. You can

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. Can be prevented.

In addition, since the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. In the state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball is the main body of the lower plate body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts on the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the game ball from moving to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the burden on the game hall side where 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface expands to the frontmost below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The dish unit cover 326 of the ejected dish unit 320 is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most bulged portion of the dish unit cover 326, and the dish 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, which is provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game ball, the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is located outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. There is a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous, and the storage trays (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) can be made small to make them inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be recognized at a glance and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional part 325B, the second additional part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range invisible from the front side of the lower plate 322 (lower plate second region A2). it can. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1 are provided with the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is recessed downward, and a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340, 340A having shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Therefore, since the portion on the lower plate 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower plate body 325, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a larger amount of the game balls are loaded by the storage. No boundary (seam, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if a large number of game balls are stored. There is no action, and it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower tray body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and the lower plate 322 are provided, and the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to be seen from the front (player) (makes it difficult to see), the pachinko machine 1 can have a clean appearance and a good appearance, which is of interest to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), it is possible for the player to play a game in the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the player from being distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball removing hole 322a, the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged from the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a to the lower side. It is possible to make the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball outlet 322a and discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower tray 322 by a portion between the lower tray 322a and the guide means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. It is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player from being distracted, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed to the player by the ball guiding section 322c and the like. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, it gives the player the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. You can As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate that can be seen from the front. The size of the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice as large as the size of the plate 322. Therefore, as with the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view lower side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Production operation unit attachment for attaching a large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 in the center of the front side of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 of FIG. The plate front lower decorative portion 326c, which is provided with the portion 326a and is below the substantially center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, is recessed so as to be recessed rearward. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be made to appear as if it protrudes significantly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect). The operating unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at a glance, it can be recognized that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part of the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) is made to wrap around behind, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322). It is not necessary to play the game while being aware that the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his/her hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate 322 (front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, entertain the game, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since it is difficult for the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness given to a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, which can reassure the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on the front end side is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and the appeal power to the player can be enhanced and the player It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can move the lower plate 322 into the lower plate 322. When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) or the like to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and can attract the player's attention strongly, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decoration and effect of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically so as to be opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. It is possible to play the game with a feeling of feeling, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and entertain the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward is formed below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of FIG. Of the operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button, and outside so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side first member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the second effect display device 460A, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the clearance between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a, etc., so that while preventing the appearance from being deteriorated, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be upsized, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strong. The pachinko machine 1 can be attracted to and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that is cylindrically projected from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide those outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 near the outer peripheral edge The surface is a plane formed by an opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the forward/backward direction of the operation button 410). The light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal plane).
Therefore, by combining the button base 413 and the button base 413 with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer peripheral edge, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the inner side and the inner side of the operation button.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged inside the operation button 410 are increased. It is possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device to entertain the player with the operation button 410. It is possible to easily provide 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with a design (decorative property). Can be directed, and it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque, so that the button frame 412 has a button The back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. can be surely hidden from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be reliably hidden. The appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced and the appearance can be improved.

In addition, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end to the inner side, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to cooperate with the player. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made invisible from the side, the main body 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470), and it is possible to easily secure a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved satisfactorily.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, the directionality of the outer circumference is lost as compared with the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is increased in size, it can be pressed without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is upsized, it is easy to perform the player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410 without operating the operation button 410 while checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which makes the player entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the effect of the player is operated by presenting effect images according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by means of an effect image, light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by having the player actively participate in the player participation type production and entertaining. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good for some players, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is obviously different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appealing power to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's expectation for production using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 without the first button decoration portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first unit) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Although the one including the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450 side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are shown. At least one of the display device 460A may be projected to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire outer circumference. The button base 413 may have a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (planar decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side.
Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side be subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been shown. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and is connected to each other behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). 322 may be used, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and part of it may go around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). You may want to stay.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (the shape of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the shape is not limited to this, and a polygonal prismatic surface or a front surface concave in a polyhedral shape may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “operation dial, touch panel, etc. "Equipment with an operating device", "equipment with a rotating body having a decoration on the surface", "equipment with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration", "game Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the machine, those with a decorative body that imitates the scene (diorama) etc. ", "Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the gaming machine, and predetermined patterns A member such as a unit or a panel provided with ", etc., which is decorated by a seal, printing or the like" may be attached. Further, the number of members to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (production operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Alternatively, a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the game machine to the front surface of such a plate unit cover by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is defined by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although the example of covering from the front to be difficult to see is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to be seen from the front.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction, but have an arc shape. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged at the front and rear (or the upper and lower) is provided under predetermined conditions. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visible when the above condition is satisfied. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a rear surface can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side like a magic mirror", "a transparent state by turning on/off a power source like a liquid crystal film" And becomes opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized." The front member and the rear member may be movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are overlapped with each other.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. The player can see the decoration by the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as magic mirrors, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. The player can show the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is made brighter by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously made brighter by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means of the front member and the rear member, respectively, are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member passes through the front member and the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character). Can be shown to the player.
With this, by appropriately selecting a portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the back side is dark, so that the surface of the front member or the rear member is Glittering decorations can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific examples, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror, but the same effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (has a light transmitting property). If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or light-emitted) by the light of a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the player can be shown a variety of light-emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. 123 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 125 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input/output to/from the lending device connection terminal plate for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with the display plate, FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 127 is FIG. 128 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 128 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951 and a peripheral control board 1510, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 123, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on and the game operation is performed. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or an instantaneous voltage of a predetermined voltage. A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of stoppage is mainly provided.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once added is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in") for updating the jackpot determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the jackpot gaming state, from among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset). A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (which is input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), at high speed, other values within a predetermined numerical range are sequentially extracted without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping with other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset terminal provided with no reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 114, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. The detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the winning hole 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. In addition, in the gate sensor 4003 which detects the game sphere which passes the gate section 2003 which is shown in Figure 114, the count sensor 4005 which detects the game sphere which enters into the special winning a prize 2005, and the back unit 3000 which is shown in Figure 9 in. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device 1403. , A second special symbol display device 1405, a first special reserved number display device 1404, a second special reserved number display device 1406, a normal symbol display device 1402, a status display device 1401, and a round display device 1407 to output a drive signal or To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. As the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001, 201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 1310ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 133). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310eaa, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. 133). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310eaa and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 129). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 124, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that also has various functions, and the state of the pachinko machine 1. Error LED indicator 860b for The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 124, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches for payout. To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 103. And a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the payout control MPU 952a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various kinds of information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about payout as a main pay serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data of a serial system as a signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means).
In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output when a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of a game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in the serial data method, and the operation signal (detection signal of the operation switch 954 (detection). Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control without reset function 952cb, thereby performing payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number “2” is displayed, it means “ball ball” (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. "Payout detection sensor error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). That a “retry error” occurs when the number “5” is displayed (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value). When the number “6” is displayed, it means “full” (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full-fill detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6) Is disconnected, and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet) That the number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error contents regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer is used as a main control board 1310 for proceeding with a game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 or a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending button 328 and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a terminal device connection terminal plate for playing ball, etc. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. 125. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be precise, the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 describes a predetermined voltage VL from the supplied AC 24V (DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter "+12V" in this embodiment).
)) is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 together with the ground LG by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), while the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and It is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880.

The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the unpaid balance display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 switches on (turns on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven, so-called a dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending/returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting, and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of light emitted from the container can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball loan display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for the game ball, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The firing control unit 953 performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the electric power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. And the detection signal from the input terminal are input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, The game ball received by the ball-sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launcher 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and also effects drawing of the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are performed, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker are used. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A control unit 4165 and a volume adjusting volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion are provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various LED light emission modes) Peripheral control RAM 1511c storing information for managing schedule data and the like for defining, and various types of information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of the jackpot gaming state and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d storing information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. It is described as ".").

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The lighting data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is output from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) to the lamp. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of No. 3 is output from the peripheral I/O port for peripheral decoration control of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400, and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control circuit board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral control various serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak are read/written with various data via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 1511ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control internal serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control internal WDT 1511af included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, to independently perform data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading/writing to/from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading/writing is performed on the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, while various peripheral control types are used. For input/output devices such as the serial I/O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between the two.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I/O ports for motor drive boards, serial I/O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port, a main control board serial I/O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.
This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player). Of the notification sound and the notification sound, the notification sound and the notification sound do not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, or when the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and also to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to shift to a game state advantageous for the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is added to the correction information acquired by 5%, which is the acquired correction information. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side effect display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1600 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that stores, for exclusive use, the information to be backed up among various information that is updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf which stores, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, those which are not backup targets, Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effects described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and thus “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And “Bank4” (also used for production information (1 ms) and production backup information (1 ms) described later with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is output. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. It is a storage area to be set, and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and detection operation signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400 are stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. Based on the above, various kinds of information obtained by the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are set in the storage area. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive substrate 4450 is arranged. When the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 on the basis of a LOCKN signal which will be output to notify the fact. It is a storage area in which various kinds of information acquired regarding the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects during connection with the effect display drive substrate 4450 are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door-side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed last time, the processing is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Is becoming

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. As performance backup information (1 ms), by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb has two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 143). Is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state (for example, for instructing the effect start when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on time). Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over the days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM) that is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, the backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the sound control of the music and the sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source, various character data of screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and various sounds such as sound effects. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and serializing to the door frame side effect display device 460. The rendered drawing data is directed to the effect display drive substrate 4450 which is arranged near the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d for transmission, and a differential circuit 1512e for differentiating LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so that the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. I have it. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image to be described later, and an operation menu background image to be described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, etc., the body frame backside image data used for displaying the body frame backside image where the position of each part on the backside of the body frame 4 can be visually seen from the player, and the display of the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and being output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the V blank signal is input, and the first data is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral controller 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input with the V blank signal for the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from a channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has "V-by-One (V-by-One By adopting a differential type communication called "registered trademark"", the structure is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a differential interface by a serial method called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface by a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data of one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen worth (1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data (for frames) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side The image display data for the effect display device 460 is supplied from the channel CH2 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (for one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Not output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the sound source with a built-in VDP1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume that is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume control volume 1510a and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually compared with the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the usage The maximum volume is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of sending the notification sound to notify the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1 will be simply described. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification sound is forcibly set to silence. The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value, which is the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a and adjusted (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set when the mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405), the sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

As described above, when the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the alarm sound is output to notify the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1, the effect is generated. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 128, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is for playing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as differential system serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also used as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 128, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface.
The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first Since the length of the wiring required for the second route) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 included in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4 side such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 included in the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized unitary structure of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, " By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if the mechanism of differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd. is adopted and it is hard to be influenced by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data in parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when being received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the regular data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm appears. There is a problem that such an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Then, even if the serial data of the differential system is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image such as a sandstorm is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is detached from the body frame 4 for maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics, Inc. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Can be used as a differential 1 pair cable that electrically connects between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are respectively formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns separated from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 cross over a plurality of relay terminal plates, so that the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the wiring of the power supply and other various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one wiring is red and the other wiring is gray, and the wiring for supplying power in the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitization circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. To the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it is possible to determine that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 does not have a problem, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, “a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device” is notified. "Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and at the same time, a notification sound to that effect (for example, "a malfunction occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device"). ") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a.
The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and sets them in the acquired calendar information and time information. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the brightness adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, is included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are equipped with cold cathode tube type backlights, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON/OFF control or only ON of the backlight. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer.
In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

Thus, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state in low probability or high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. You can adjust the brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted on the basis of the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, an additional 85% of the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the effect sound, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A/D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the volume portion 1510a is the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player). Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, or when the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the press operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the sound source with built-in sound source VDP1512a, and the effect sound is changed. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to hear the adjusted sound volume and hear the music or the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the volume adjusted to be high and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player, who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and was playing a game, feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time he or she sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time uses the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 129. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various boards and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the Pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 129, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a firing control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The portion 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple to smooth +37V and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 953.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the gaming ball 5a shown in FIG. The drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 682, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 to output the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply generation circuit 935d is DC+5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as “+5V”), DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and DC. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5V is a +5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12V is a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24V is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. That is, +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the forward direction of the power supply terminal of the payout control RAM by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Electric current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charges charged in the capacitor BC1 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g has a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The electric current is flowing toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a has a diode at the power supply terminal. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

Three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 129, and among these three kinds of voltages, +12V and Two types of voltage of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the surroundings via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 130A, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are used to drive the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively.
The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as “+9V”) from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to +9V created by the +9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x produces +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components forming the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 128, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the payout control substrate 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V.
The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g and supplied with +5V is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and +5V of the main control board 1310 is not provided. The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a and the like, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decoration board of the door frame or the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line. As compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. 131 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 132 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 133 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 129 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit shown in FIGS. 123 and 129. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 131, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded by ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal to which +5V created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g is applied, its second terminal grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component removed from its third terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Have been smoothed.

The +5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) to form a capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and creates +5V. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 131, +5V obtained by removing the noise component and smoothing by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1.
The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function are provided. The associated main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 131, +5V obtained by removing the noise component and smoothing by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to perform RAM clear within a predetermined period after power is turned on, and error release after power is turned on (after the period when the RAM clear function is achieved, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from power on) And the function of performing. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of releasing the error that the payout control board 951 has, the main control board 1310 does not operate when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

To the main control board 1310, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated, while a logic signal is output from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 131, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has a pull-up with one end electrically connected to the +12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. In the meantime, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and is input.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0, The circuit will also turn on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a is for instructing to perform a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is enhanced by using +12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. Detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 which are input through the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 123 while being pulled up are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure, and when detecting the sign of power failure or momentary power failure, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +24V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 132, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied to the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , +12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +24V is interrupted or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +12V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of +12V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the other end and electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in accordance with the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. The (logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal which is obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. On the other hand, when the signal having the logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the terminal 1 which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of +24V and the power failure of +12V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous blackout is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal has a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it as a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 132, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, and the power failure notice signal is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 has its logic level of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power source line, and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is increased to +5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, The switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, and the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. At one end, it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is inputted to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and its logic is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. While the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs as a power failure notice signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. The logic of the peripheral power failure notification signal input to the control board 1510 is the inverted logic, and is different from the logic of the power failure notification signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notification signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Of the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is connected via a wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the control reference voltage of +5V to notify the power failure by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure notification signal, while the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are provided. In order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a between the board 951 and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using +12V that is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to/from the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal transmits the serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 1310cb having no reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function.

In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or the detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. They are input respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal that notifies the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 123. Drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various display devices, and various information regarding games (game information) Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) about the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. Is configured.
) Is mainly composed.

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (electrostatic capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the positive terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 and also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 131 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as the main serial data.

The main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main loop serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41eaa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When the shift register 1310aea transmits the main-circle serial data, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR50 is turned off and the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU1511a. Input to the input terminal of.

Accordingly, as described above, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted completely, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can surely receive the data without any loss.

When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is the logic of.

As described above, in this embodiment, the +5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage +5V of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the +12V power supply line to which the communication voltage +12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. In this case, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of the resistors MR50, MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 for communication. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted while being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 139. FIG. 134 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit, FIG. 135 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135, and FIG. 137 is a payout motor drive. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 139 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals to/from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 134, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 129 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with the noise component removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of which is connected to a ground (GND) to a capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5V, which has the noise component removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and also through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, when +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate at the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM. The memory contents are retained by applying the payout VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
The payout control unit 952 is, as a peripheral circuit, reset as shown in FIG. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Is able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to a capacitor (GND) and grounded. It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with the reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 134, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power outage advance signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 124, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply substrate 931 and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input is explained, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26 by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON/OFF is repeated for a short time.

A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on/off according to a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. It Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is increased to the +5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

As described above, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, so that the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal, which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI, is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power source line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing a variation in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on/off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state where the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and/or It is possible for the player to determine that the main frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Since the outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, the hall computer, based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, receives the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in a state of being opened from the main body frame 4 or whether the main body frame 4 is in a state of being opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It is possible for the player who is playing the game to determine that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even when the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the main body frame is opened. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618′ and body frame opening switch 619′). The door frame opening switch 618′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619' is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 remains open from the main body frame 4, and the main body is broken for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the door frame opening switch 618' and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches or even when the wire is disconnected. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 and a power failure notice signal.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or the momentary power failure is detected, the reset function is not provided. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW. The payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951 while the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V. At this time, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951, and therefore is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the withdrawal control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a according to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 is for detecting whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, the signal pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951 while the accommodation space is full of game balls. , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full-state detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 and becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power board 931. The signal that is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of gaming balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 and the payout control board. In 951, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47 and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistors PR45, PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is used, the detection signals from the various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not a full tank of the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 operates. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue the payout of the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834. There is also a case where the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834 and the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up to cause a failure, or a mechanism or the like that transmits the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279 is first configured in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full-tank detection sensor so that the noise component is removed. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
Output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage through the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is changed by turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the previous stage, and the signal is changed as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Entered in.

The output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 131 is +12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the operation switch 954.

A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is provided in the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) or to clear the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has functions and. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing the RAM clear within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). In the function for canceling the error in ), it becomes an error canceling signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor of the preceding stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned on, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR43 which is the voltage applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the terminals 3 and 4 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by inputting it to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5 and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal Nos. 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned off, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage that rises to the +5V side by the resistor PR51 turns on the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage and also turns on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power source line and the +5V power source line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and the terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power terminal of the payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12V or +5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th terminal and the 7th terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and a ground LG created from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 138, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating infrared LEDs and phototransistors).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photo coupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND).
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 134 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit including the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. It

The circuit including the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. It

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. To be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photo coupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal that is output from the output terminal of the above through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 2 through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic of LOW becomes PR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from the input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b, as shown in FIG. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is sent to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840 and the like shown in FIG. 124 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception completion of the main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is used. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 139.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the payout control board 951 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And big hit information output signal such as 2 round big hit information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, ordinary symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(b), in addition to the outer edge frame door opening information output signal described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The award ball number information output signal outputted for each, the main award ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Output signal, probability change information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and game information signals such as starting mouth winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and an award ball number information output signal, and the main award ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information Eight signals called output signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hole) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the game of the player and the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1) and the number of jackpots in which the round reaches 15 times (the number of jackpots of 15 rounds jackpot). For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of big hits in the second round and the number of big hits in the 15th land from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to know whether it is a two-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players choose whether to play a game or not by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot in practice, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may cause the player to be more excited than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15-round big hit information output signal and the 2-round big hit information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the big hit information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2-round big hit. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can know whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit, and the data counter has the 15-round big hit. The number of big hits and the number of big hits in the second round can be displayed separately or only the number of big hits in the 15th round can be displayed as the number of big hit game states, which may arouse the player's aspirations more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the award ball number information output signal, the main award ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

These various signals will be briefly described. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal does not occur during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. This is a signal that tells that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that entered in 10 reaches 10 balls. The 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that 15 round jackpots have occurred. 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2 round big hit has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal has probability fluctuation It is a signal that tells that it is in a state, the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The variable display is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped (stopped) state, and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 ( (Stopped) is a signal that conveys that it is in a state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that conveys that a time saving state has occurred, the start mouth winning a prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Every time a game ball enters the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to that effect.

On the external terminal board 784, as shown in FIG. 140, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a line. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys that fact whenever the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls as a prize ball each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is also possible to count the number of balls of the paid game balls to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is not generated during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In the present embodiment, the signal is transmitted while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 is open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer edge frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, while the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is being input, the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and It can be understood that the body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, it is a signal that indicates the state, and in the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stop). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting opening winning information output signal.
As described above, the start-port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start-port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the start-port winning information output signal to the first start port 2002 or the second opening of the pachinko machine 1 each time. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and count the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is provided in black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that the 15-round jackpot is being generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input to grasp the total number of 15-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is provided in pink and outputs a 2-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the two-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT7 is a terminal which is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, 0.128 seconds is output from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the ordinary symbol is ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 in a variable display. You can grasp the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs the time saving medium information output signal. As described above, the time saving/time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving/shortening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving/shortening information output signal is input. At the same time, the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state can be grasped by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs the information output signal during probability variation.
As described above, the probability variation information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability variation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability variation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the probability variation information output signal is input, the hall computer is in a state where the probability change occurs in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability change is input to grasp the total number of times that probability change has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball that has been balled reaches 10 balls. In the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to receive 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do.
Note that, for example, game balls that are to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005. When the number of spheres of No. reaches 20 or more and the main prize sphere number information output signal is output plural times, the main prize sphere number information output signal is 0.256 (=0.128 seconds×2 times) seconds, As if it were one continuous signal, it is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control board. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are respectively colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 respectively, other wirings are erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the physical connection. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 for arranging in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center toward the right side, in this respect also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various output on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer from being erroneously electrically connected.

In the present embodiment, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main award ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively holes from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When a 15-round big hit happens to the pachinko machine 1 at the time when the remaining amount is running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the payout is performed. (In addition, if, for example, a ball clogging or a ball scatter occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal that conveys that fact, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game balls cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk of the hall or the like, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (in addition, for example, in the payout device 830. Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball scatter is specified) and the problem is solved, whereby the game ball is returned to the payout state.

However, even in the situation where the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits, the game balls are paid out by the clerk in the hall. When returning to the state where the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid gaming balls one after another, the payout control board 951 is the time when the 15 round big hit ends and the 15 round big hit does not occur. Whenever the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as a prize ball reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal for notifying that is output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, despite the fact that the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the payout balls are actually paid out, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. We adopted a mechanism that communicates to the hall computer via the. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (a trouble such as a ball clogging in the supply nozzle or the like, a ball clogging in the dispensing device 830, a ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 141 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 141, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 produces a plus signal. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the three synchronizing signals of the clock signal are restored (that is, the parallel signal before being serialized is restored). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8-bit red video signals, green video signals, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are higher 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected as described above. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference is transmitted. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame-side production transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 into the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and the production display drive board 4450. Is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. Serial signal (serial data) by the differential method "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the side effect transmitter IC 1512d is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and is input to the RXIN+ and RXIN− terminals of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. In the case where two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are output. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is, as described above, the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zine Electronics stock. The structure is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. To forcefully output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 purposely outputs the data. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, the VDDO terminal, the LVDSVDD terminal, the PLLVDD terminal, and the PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removing high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and a PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI when +3.3V is supplied (applied) and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, on the rising edge. This is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it is in a state where it cannot output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both terminals. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, For some reason, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Transmit to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral doors. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistance SDR3 that is a damping resistance.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18 It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the ground, and are the same ground. Has become.

[13. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 145. FIG. 142 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 143 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 143 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 143, and FIG. 145 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 142(a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. , Two prize balls are designated,..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as ball rental balls as a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 142(b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls,... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to CR machines and general machines, and self-check is designated in this command 30H.
By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 143, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated by the specification of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and short-lived states include a low-probability short-lived state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-lived state, a high-probability short-lived state that indicates a high-probability state that is a short-lived state, and a low-probability It is composed of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates a state that is not a time saving state, and a high probability non time saving state that indicates a high probability state that is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the short-time state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the time for displaying symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in the predetermined time is displayed. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time saving state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls to the second starting opening 2004 (in other words, compared with the non-time saving state) The second starting port 2004 is configured by increasing the determination of whether to open/close the pair of movable pieces and lengthening the period of opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate of game balls to (ball entry rate).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 143, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123. Concerning the second special symbol display 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. In these various commands, the status is “B*H” and the mode is “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
) Is assigned ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 143, the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). Is to open or start the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the big winning opening 1 (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). It is for instructing the closing of the winning opening 2005 between rounds or the start of closing), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (shown in FIG. 123). It conveys the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. The big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is the big hit. It is for instructing display of symbol information.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium-large prize opening winning award effect (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). In the small hitting ending command, a small hitting ending start is instructed.

As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 When the special winning opening 2005 is opened in the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is closed), The special winning opening 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened and the special winning opening 2005 is entered) Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) Is sent to.

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 143, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command of the main control return destination at power-on. A status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated by the specification of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 when the power is turned on (in addition to the case of turning on the power, the time of power restoration including power failure or momentary power failure occurs). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) ..
), in the above, low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return, It is composed of information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game copyright it belongs to, what kind of game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes with a limited number of changes in special symbols. It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 123. ing.

As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Also included). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 143, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123. Concerning the device 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “E*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated by the specification of the pachinko machine 1).

The general figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying the off, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving indicating a high probability state being a time saving state. State, a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a low-probability state that is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is not a short-time state (usually As a gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation time) is transmitted, and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric-role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123. It consists of a command called "Hit opening", "Uden opening display", and "Public ending". A status of “F*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal figure, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted when the universal figure opening starts, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the starter solenoid 2107 to move to the left or right). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the notification display category is composed of commands such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The prize winning abnormality display command is issued when the player hits the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the game ball is there). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is an electrical command in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, for example. When there is a connection abnormality, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005 etc. occurs, it is an instruction to start the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command indicates that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. When the occurrence of the above occurs, the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to notify the door opening. The door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In the case of the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued by the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main frame opening command is issued when the main frame 4 is in the open state, and the main frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when the prize is won in the special winning opening except during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Any one of them is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the status display section is made up of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 144, “7*H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 144, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. The status "8*H" and the mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to this test command ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 126). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described below is performed. The test command is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 executed in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 144, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command called special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is It is for instructing the state transition from the shortened operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command The special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls that have not been played (the number of reserves) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0-4 special symbols 2 pending (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (reserved number), and the ordinary symbol storage command is the ordinary symbol 1 to 0-4. In order to convey the number of balls (the number of balls not yet used for variable display of ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game balls have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8) Yes, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 1 is held in advance. Based on the first special symbol display 1403 is to instruct the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it pre-reads and instructs the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting mouth 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command for designating the end of fluctuation reduction is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions has been completed (after the deviating stop period has elapsed). "High probability N times" is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed, which has digested the high-probability number (after the elapse of the outage stop period), and the special symbol 1 memory command is when the special symbol 1 operation reserve ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of holdings that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting opening When the game ball enters 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols), Special symbol 2 memory command, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is still in the variable display of the special symbol In the state that there is a number of reserves that are not used, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of reserves increases, and from the number of reserves, the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device 1405 It is sent to when the number of holdings is reduced, and the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding number of balls changing (a gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and a normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400). In the state that there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol in the device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the reserved number in the normal symbol display device 1402 Usually used for variable display of the symbol when the number of holding is decreased), is sent to the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command, when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding ball increases (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002) When the number of balls to hold is increased, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching command is transmitted when the number of special symbols 2 operation holding balls is increased (the number of game balls enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings increases). Sent). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, the start opening winning command is, as described above, at the time of the start opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second starting opening). When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly by voice to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in (1) uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 145, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146, and FIG. 148 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not a reach (out of reach) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated Reach determination random number for use in the determination, and the variation pattern for use in determining the variation pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 shown in FIG. 123. For random numbers, big hit symbols for use in determining big hit symbols derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the big hit game state, and for this big hit symbol Random numbers for initial value determination for big hit symbols for use in determining the initial value of random numbers, small hits Small hits derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the gaming state. Random numbers for small hit symbols to be used for determining symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small hit symbols to be used for determining the initial values of these random numbers for small hit symbols, etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and the initial value of this normal symbol per determination random number. For the normal symbol per determination for initial value determination random number, and the normal symbol variation pattern random number used for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 123, etc. are prepared. ing.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, whereas other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting toward the maximum value, and subsequently counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for symbol hit determination. ..

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated at the time of power-on, or in the main-control-side power-on process, which will be described later, of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. A checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM, such as when it does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol is usually the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 123. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and usually performs the initial value derivation process to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which updates the random number for symbol determination based on the extracted ID code. It is executed and the derived fixed value is set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the RAM with main control The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two-step security measure of are taken to prevent analysis.

Here, an advantage that an ID code is taken out from a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value are obtained illegally, its ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a' included in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the main control program described above performs main power supply side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “ WDT control register”) to set a timer setting value to activate the main control built-in WDT 1310af and reset the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (in the main control MPU 1310a built-in until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value) Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 132 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing +24V and the reference voltage or comparing +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is started to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function by setting its logic to LOW. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 can be applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done. Whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 described above as the power failure notice signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, by setting the logic of the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to HI. Entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure advance notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is activated (boot. Waiting). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the power outage notice signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power cutoff process (power cutoff) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in main power supply side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S34). This setting reads the power recovery time information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sets this power recovery time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is cut off, a state in which power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, fraudulent person A state in which the main control board 1310 is reset by the high frequency output from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power off process When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol per determination judgment random number based on the taken out ID code. Always perform the initial value derivation process that derives the same fixed value from, and set this fixed value to the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol per determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the above random number for the ordinary symbol. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports for the payout control board 951 (reception channels and transmission channels), serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channels and transmission channels). Corresponding to the above), the transmission serial port prescaler is set with the communication speed and the presence/absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set with the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing organization, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 123 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and obtaining a random number, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register.
When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at a high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131). Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when obtaining a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control program sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in (4) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt period set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control program sends an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time-sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error release navigation command from the time of power-on for a predetermined time. The RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing error notification associated with an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storing unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variation pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is an input of the power outage notice signal. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. , The second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407 and the like, the drive signal output to stop (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting this RAM access prohibition, it becomes impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

Here, description will be made on the point that the presence/absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time standby process in step S22 is followed by the determination of the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 and the subsequent processes are performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary blackout occurs. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V allows the power from the pachinko island equipment to be supplied. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control-side main processing or main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and pachinko island equipment When the power is shut off, the main control side power shutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 are displayed. Immediately before the waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) until the system for performing the drawing control of the device 460 is activated (booted) is started, and the waiting time is reached. Then, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 In step S52, the interrupt initial setting is performed, and then, in step S52, the interrupt permission setting is performed, so that the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed and the main control side RAM is updated even if the content of the main control internal RAM is updated. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the processing at power-on of the main control side is started again at power recovery.

Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the checksum value based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the clerk in the hall or the like, and the information stored in the RAM with the main control is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the RAM clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that it will be done.

In view of this, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information according to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control-side power-off processing constituted by the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a's main processing is completed. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the calculated checksum value in step S64). Since the determination is made, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control internal WDT 1310af so that the contents of the main control internal RAM are reset. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the main control side power-off process within the "instantaneous power failure or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the power-on process on the main control side during power recovery, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous blackout. Therefore, in the case where the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the above determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time is reset again. Since it becomes impossible to start timing, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, a step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt process described later). Adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or a momentary power failure, the part covered by software so that the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The content of the main control built-in RAM is configured by dividing it into two parts, that is, the part covered by the hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all by surely completing the disconnection process. It is possible to reliably prevent (game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). For transmission, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 143 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 123. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem when the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on at step S50 is not set will be described.

For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game display screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 is displayed. 8 activates the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, and a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 makes steps. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is shifted from the state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123, and a special winning opening 1 count display command is transmitted to convey the number of balls of the game ball entering the special winning opening 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, what round) of the big hit game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the special winning opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107, for example, when finishing four rounds of the big hit game state (fourth round). From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control of the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the special winning opening 2005 rounds of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing to shift from the state to the open state (that is, opening of the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) is transmitted. To do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

Further, for example, a screen informing that the game state becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the fact that the movable piece is expanded) The main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece of FIG. 10 is expanded in the left-right direction and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control built-in RAM in step S34 to save the work area. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by restoring to the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure. That is, the movable piece moves from a substantially vertical rising state to a state in which the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is brought to a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen indicating that the game board side effect display device 1600 displays. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he or she plays.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 143. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the 4 rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening/closing member 2107 as the destination of the return of the main control board 1310. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the effect that it will shift to the state in which it is in the state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies the screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the big hit game state (that is, the screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that tells that there is something (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to display a game area on the game board side effect display device 1600 and instruct a player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine to play a game ball into the special winning opening 2005 after power recovery. For example, in the above-described example, in the state where the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen is displayed as a destination to which the main control board 1310 is to be restored, in which the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started to expand the pair of movable pieces in the left-right direction (for example, "the movable piece is The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The game is played so that the game ball enters the lower starting opening." is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to instruct the player, who is seated in front of the pachinko machine, to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the RAM with built-in control must be cleared in step S38. Accordingly, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 143 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, that is, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in the state stored in. In these commands, a power-on state command is first transmitted and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, the time of power restoration when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to perform the RAM clear, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs (Including when power is restored), in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) It is composed of information for instructing whether or not to perform and information for indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine refers to the copyright of which work when the so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (eg, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs after being played 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of the movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misconceptions that it is flowing to the production line. Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) is used for the same product copyright. It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, also when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 143. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus operates as the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state continues until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which probability variation occurs in a state where the number of changes of special symbols is limited), Based on the above, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to discriminate which work copyright the main control board 1310 belongs to. What type of machine type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspecting step of the production line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 146 and 147.

When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 148 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, the second register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on according to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary symbol described later. And, in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights according to the normal symbol variation pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 951 normally issues various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). The time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payment has been received is input.
Specifically, when the variation time of the variation pattern or the normal symbol variation pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, When the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, whereby the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 123 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123 that detects the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 and the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraud using a magnet shown in FIG. 123. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 has normally received the detection signal and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later are read, and the input information is read. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 144 corresponding to the signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 4004. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201, the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2005. From the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage of time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as having no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two times of reading by two readings for comparing the first to third times and two readings for comparing the second to fourth times. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, the detection signals from the general winning a prize mouth sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the second starting mouth sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for big hit symbols and random numbers for small hit symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for initial value determination for the big hit symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 147, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so that each time the winning random number updating process is performed, each counter counts up. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value is set. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol per hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for symbol hit determination. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 147. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, are respectively updated. However, each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of occurs, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hitting symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 142 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and the prize ball is paid out. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to inform that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information. The self-check command shown in FIG. 142 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls planned to be paid out as a prize ball. Since it has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Alternatively, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. For example, a self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls that has exceeded the next time In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. When is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 145 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to the effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and output information is stored in the output RAM of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 144 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), etc. A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 144 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 123, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as the big hit determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. Whether or not to determine (whether to generate the jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches (determination as to whether or not probability variation occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the above-described big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value is read from the normal time determination table, while the value 31768 is set in the high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the big hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). It is performed depending on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, while the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 entrainment effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display device according to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set to light the 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. .. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the opened state twice (round), The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1407a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. At some time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to light the 15-round display lamp 1407b of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence/absence of fluctuation in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control RAM. Remember.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece is opened/closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 143 are created and described as the transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the determined variation pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information storage described above as the output information is set. Store in the area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. 143. Is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. , When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation pattern based on the random number for the normal symbol variation pattern described above. Deciding, creating various commands shown in FIG. 143 to be related to the general figure entrainment effect, storing as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the ordinary symbol display device according to the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to turn on the 1402, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens/closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in a game state, or outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens/closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals relating to the game, such as the time saving information output information and the starting mouth winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. Included in this transmission information are various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 143 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related. Various commands classified into commands and big hits (for example, a big prize based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 123) when a game ball entering a big prize hole 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected) 144 a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to public figure synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric figure effect, FIG. 144 Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release) Navi command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41eaa and can be completely transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main-cycle serial data. At the time of power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, in order to notify the power recovery in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 143 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , A main-cycle serial data, which constitutes a power-on state command, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, status, The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, the game information is read from the game backup information and the game information is responded to. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 144. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the (unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the timing, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off while the game is progressing. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. 143, the peripheral control board 1510 sends the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. It is possible to output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is the main control unit for setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status command and power-on main command classified into power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as main circumference serial data. , The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted in this order to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value that constitute the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be immediately restored after power recovery. As well as being able to display the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the system can be informed, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is in a broken state and is in fault. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process on the main control side, all areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, if the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 143. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, so that two commands, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM with built-in main control, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main circumference serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device for the main control board inspection process in order, and then the main control return destination command is configured when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 165. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process continued, and FIG. 151 is a payout control unit following FIG. 150. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a continuation of power-on processing, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of rotation detection sensor history creation processing, and FIG. 154 is a sprocket. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of fixed position determination skip processing, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of ball deviation determination processing, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. 157 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball scoring award ball stock number addition processing, FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, and FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing an example of payout ball tilting movement determination setting processing. Yes, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing, FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of ball-bending operation setting processing, FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing, and FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of an error cancellation operation determination process, and FIG. 165 is a signal process (a) at the time of a payout operation by a ball lending, from the CR unit. 5 is a timing chart showing the input signal confirmation processing (a) of FIG.

First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation detection sensor history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gaze movement determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gaze movement setting processing, retry movement monitoring processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination processing and the error canceling operation determination processing will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball gaze determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the pay-out-ball-hit action determination process, the retry action monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main action setting processes of step S562 in the pay-out control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball deviation determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, number of prize ball stock for prize balls. The priority order is set in the order of the addition process, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball, the stock monitoring process, and the pay-out-ball tilt motion determination setting process.

[15-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program turns on the power of the payout control unit under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. Perform time processing. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 952a to set the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 952a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input/output setting (I/O input/output setting) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure notification voltage. A warning signal (payment blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time of power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitor circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform the RAM clear, and the operation switch is determined. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (power-on operation control means on the payout control side). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area It is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set is erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. To be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to permit access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) to be described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a. Then, this power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. The term "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned off and the state in which the power is turned on, but also the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step In S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the payout control program causes all areas of the payout control internal RAM to be processed. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clearing process upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power fails or momentarily stops, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is sent as the power failure warning to the main control board 1310. Input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input. To judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 142) are normally received, and the payout motor 834. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to the player, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the payout motor is issued. The drive signal is output to 834, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is output to the external terminal board 784 as the prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 834 is actually 10 Each time a game ball is paid out, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting prize ball number information is provided. This prize ball number information signal output determination counter indicates the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input processing of step S550 described later. Based on the detection signal of, the payout motor 834 stores in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. The processing (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 834 is the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control RAM. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is added to the value of the signal output determination counter based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input processing of step S550 described later. In step S548, the value of the award ball number information signal output determination counter is read from the award ball information storage area, and the value of the read award ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10. During this time, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of balls exceeding that number is used as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter to store the prize ball information in the payout control RAM. The memory is updated in the area ing. ), and outputs a display signal to the error LED display device 860b.

Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection. The signal, the main payment ACK signal and the like from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and store them in the input information storage area as input information. To do.

Following step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball-blown state due to a payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is determined, the ball-blur determination is set as the determination condition. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 Time, full tank determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the sensor 827. In addition to performing time management such as, etc., the number of balls of the game balls received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 do not match each other. Time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of game balls is repeated I do. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-judging determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball-blurring judgment time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the out-of-ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Every time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball outage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured.
The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6.
In the processing of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set).

By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 830 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and while paying out the game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, a momentary power failure or power failure and CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of game balls cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. It is like this.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or stop even when the power is restored or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of a momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of MPU952a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and the payout ball gaze motion determination setting process is performed. As the setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not performed, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible is set. The PRDY signal output setting information is set and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored when the power is restored, so it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout to the CR unit 6 is performed. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected to each other through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected to each other via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. In order to inform that the payout operation for the payout is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 951. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-described foul cover unit 270 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-mentioned payout device 830 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. It determines whether or not. For example, to determine whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to detect the full tank and the out-of-ball check process at this time. When the detection signal from the sensor 279 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF during the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is When the state changes from OFF to ON, the timing of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the gaming space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full is described above as the status information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the game space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area area. To do.

To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to run out the balls in the current full tank and ball out check processing. When the detection signal from the detection sensor is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is OFF. When the state changes from ON to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer updating process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is ON, the out-of-ball information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is in the state. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number. Information is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 142) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands are not normally received, a connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal, and ball scooping are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 951 is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this ball-out information, when the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than the predetermined number, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number “1”) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening) classified into the status display shown in FIG. A command, a frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error releasing command) and a frame state 2 command are created and the main control board 1310 is created. Send to. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of balls in the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball, information relating to the location where the error occurred regarding this payout operation (hereinafter A frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including "error occurrence position information" is generated (error occurrence command generating means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program has the value 1 of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG, that is, if the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected, the above-mentioned error occurs. A cancel navigation command (first error cancel command) is output (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) when the main frame opening detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input (main frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). (I) This payout control program transmits a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) when the body frame closing detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input (body frame command sending means). , First body frame command sending means). When the door frame opening detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame command sending means, first door frame opening command). (1) Door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame command sending means). (1) Door frame command sending means). In the command transmission process (step S566), the payout control program reads the error information including the error content from the state information storage area described above, and detects the machine number information for identifying itself from another pachinko machine and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receipt of this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk uses the pachinko machine of the unit number based on this unit number information. In, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL subsequent to the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

After step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and checks in step S540 whether or not the power outage notice signal (payout power outage notice signal) is input. If there is no input of this power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If it is, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , Step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, step S554 performs CR communication processing, step S556 performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing, and step S558 performs command reception processing. Command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value is stored in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when a power failure advance notice signal (payout power failure advance notice signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control program sets clearing of the watchdog timer (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage areas for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the sum is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "processing at power-off of payout control unit".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and performs the power-on processing of the payout controller by power recovery after that.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[15-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 152 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Registers are switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creation processing will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, detects the rotation from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program causes the detection slit that grasps the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted to be the light of the rotation detection sensor 840. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the interrupted state to the non-interrupted state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is used as the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). . In this shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. The most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Shift 1 bit at a time.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

Thus, every time this rotation detection sensor history creation processing is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has the value 1 or depending on the state where the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also made when the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 can be reliably started in a state in which no balls are generated.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. 154, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipped), the payout rotation is 1. The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

In step S630, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program is the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control internal RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the pay-out built-in ROM, and is "000011111B ("B" represents a bit."" in the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have the value 0 and the lower 4. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST has a value of 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. Means that the state has been changed from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the backlash causes the payout rotating body to rotate. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of the payout motor 834 in about two steps. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation detection sensor 840 outputs the rotation. History of detection signals, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 153, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, It is performed based on the detection signal from the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, since the payout motor 834 is rotated by four steps, it is rotating more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash is absorbed. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (=2 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU 952a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the concave portions of the payout rotating body, and is formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 834 in 18 steps.

The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocked state to the non-blocked state, and (2) the detection slit rotates. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”), and (3) the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. The state is managed in three states, that is, the state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 834, the fixed position confirmation state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 834, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 834 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 transits from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (=2 ms×13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction is 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the initial value 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 3 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. .. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the dispensing device 830 is easily affected by noise and is in an environment. The payout device 830 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described (3) fixed position determination skip state, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The cycle and the period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. In the ball-blurring determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is generated.

When the ball head determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 155, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 detects the rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1.
In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, If the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball-bulging state does not occur, this routine is finished as it is. To do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing an overturning operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program sets the ball entrainment determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball gaze determination time becomes valid, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, the process for adding the various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 1310. This is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command described later. The process for adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for an award ball is performed. After the game balls have been paid out by the payout device 830, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether the command is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes to this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control internal RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. There is. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that the prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Addition process for the number of prize balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball will be described. When the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when there is a ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program determines the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control RAM. The award ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the award ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the award balls are prioritized (the award balls and the ball rental are separately managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the player continues playing the game while the tank is filled with the game balls in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is stored. It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and ends this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or higher, and to a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or higher.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676) and ends this routine.

If the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and pays attention to the performance unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 126, the player is careless. During one round, the game ball paid out as the prize ball may not be pulled out from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls are collected in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH, which is provided on the door frame 3 as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. Thereby, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 322, and the player can fill the lower plate 322 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the player should pay attention to the game as early as possible.

[15-8. Disposal ball scooping motion judgment setting processing]
Next, the payout ball tilting motion determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball leaning motion determination setting process, the gaming ball is paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 by the payout motor 834, the ball bending motion is performed, or such payout or discharge is not performed. This is a process for setting either of them.

When the pay-out ball tilting motion determination setting process is started, in the pay-out control unit 952 of the pay-out control board 951, the pay-out control program is under the control of the pay-out control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "000011111B ("B" represents a bit."
)”, the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, the payout control program, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry operation). The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormal, the payout control program determines whether or not the in-ball flag PBE-FLG has the value 1. It is determined whether or not (step S686). The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to a payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is generated. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball is not tilted.

In step S686, when the in-bulb flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when the inclining movement is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information in the payout control RAM described above. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 834.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there are unpaid balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls. It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is performed on the basis of the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control section (main processing of the payout control section) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S692, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored game balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 834 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. 156. Will increase.

On the other hand, in step S690, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (the value is 0), that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game balls are not paid out.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the flag PBE-FLG is in the state of the ball tilting, that is, when the ball tilting motion is performed, the payout control program performs a ball tilting motion setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In the ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body of the dispensing device 830 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible (CR unit 6). When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. Then, it is stored in the CR communication information storage area.
Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. . Note that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

[15-8-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In the payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to set the payout of game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, outputs the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (stop). ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). This real ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. This count will be described later in detail, but from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Based on the detection signal of. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual sphere count PB is read from the prize sphere information storage area.

Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV in step S722.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when the payout motor 834 has the number of game balls to be paid out, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program adds the value 1 to the actual sphere count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is incremented.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination in step S728, that is, When the actual ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Determine that Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Accordingly, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded up into the prize ball stock number PBS, the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out can be performed again. . By performing this retry operation, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is not yet paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the unpaid game ball.

[15-8-2. Ball-gaze operation setting process]
Next, the ball bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of making a setting for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

When the ball gaze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program causes the ball gaze judgment time to elapse as shown in FIG. 161 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed on the basis of the ball deviation determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

When the ball deflection determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-described payout control internal RAM (step S752). .

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program is The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set so as to perform the ball bending operation (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S760), and ends this routine. The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing an overturning operation. When no motion is performed (end of the ball-bending motion), the value is set to 0.

On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held), that logic HI is maintained.

Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. 162, detects the rotation of the payout control built-in RAM described above. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is "000011111B ("B" represents a bit.")" in the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC is the number of balls of the game balls that are paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842. , Is a counter for calculating the difference, and normally, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842 match. Therefore, the value becomes 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 160, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the actual payout detection The number of balls detected by the sensor 842 and the payout of game balls that do not match each other due to a mismatch with each other are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. At times, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.
Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, and step S778). ).

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied game ball will be paid out due to a retry operation is about 1 in several millions. In the present embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is obtained. Is set to the value 5.

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the power is restored. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring the payout operation (retry operation) of the game ball by the payout device 830, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of power recovery. There is. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the payout device. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by 830 is in a normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 830 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. Therefore, even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state.

If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays the "retry error". In order to inform that it is, the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set by setting retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 860b which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that the prize ball is being stocked, the payout control program sets the prize ball stock information in which the number "9" is displayed on the error LED display 860b and incorporates the payout control described above. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, in response to the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 as a RAM clear signal as described above. Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control program described above erases all of the various information stored in the main control internal RAM, and issues a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 1510. Accordingly, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (when the retry operation is abnormal). When operating normally), the value is set to 0.

Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. In the pay-out control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created in the command sending process in step S566 and sent to the main control board 1310, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the same process. In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area is stored in the output information storage area in step S548 of the same processing. Based on this, the drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b, and the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 148. The peripheral control board 1510 causes the door frame side lighting blink command to output a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in (4) to cause the plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED indicator 860b mounted on the payout control board 951. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Accordingly, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk in the hall or the like confirms a defect of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. The work can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

In addition, by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the retry operation and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Then, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that a clerk or the like in the hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842 can be minimized.

Furthermore, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC determines that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH. It has been initialized when the internal factor that it became As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as operating the operation switch 954 to cancel the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. Absent.

[15-10. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this misalignment counter reset processing, the number of balls of the game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between and.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the time has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) illustrated in FIG. 151. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 842 and the number of game balls that are paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, which is usually the number of game balls that are received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842. Are the same, so the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 160 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Therefore, by this retry operation, the ball of the game ball received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out. The number of balls and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 are determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the disproportionate game balls are repeatedly paid out. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied game ball will be paid out due to a retry operation is about several millionth.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 includes the game board 5 and the frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted as described above, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 5 (replacement of a new table). Since the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout apparatus 830, the power supply board 931 that generates the drive power supply of the payout apparatus 830 and the control power supply of the payout control board 951 have a common function as a frame. Equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, monitors the inconsistency counter INCC to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeated, as described above. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 151, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutoff is stored at the time of power shutoff, while the figure In the process of step S530 in the power-on process at power-out control unit shown at 150 (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the stored inconsistency counter INCC is restarted at power-on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5'having a different game specification from the game board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control board The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in 951 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. In other words, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 ′ mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5′, and by chance happens to have a probability of one millionth of a million, the number of unmatched game balls occurs, and the inconsistency counter INCC is generated. When it increases and the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5'. There is a risk. That is, shortly after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', a defect of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, contact of various connectors. There is a possibility that the retry operation may be suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation even though no defect has occurred.

In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 5′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 5′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out by retry operation is one millionth of the probability that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall, Since the game ball that is inconsistent due to the retry operation is the same as the probability that one ball is paid out, in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 162, there is a probability of several millions from the inconsistency counter INCC. The value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 4 by 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which corresponds to the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842, and the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and contact failure of various connectors. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 162, the segment display mounted on the payout control board 951 is notified in order to notify that there is a “retry error”. The retry error information for displaying the number “5” is set on the error LED display 860b, which is a device, and is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and poor contact of various connectors. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating that there is an error from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Note that by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the retry operation described above and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that a clerk in the hall or the like can detect the state of the pachinko machine 1. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, in the case where the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is generated every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, as described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is that the mismatch counter INCC is up to the mismatch threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 842 is reset. It is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who engages in cheating even if the player is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time.

[15-11. Error release operation determination processing]
Next, the error cancellation operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

When the error canceling operation determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 causes the operation switch 954 to cancel the error as shown in FIG. 164 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area, and does not instruct to cancel the error when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. It is determined that the operation switch 954 has not been operated, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that it is an instruction to cancel the error. It is determined that

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs the error flag state confirmation processing. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the payout device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normally operating). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the state information corresponding to the error flag is set to The RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state is read. A status command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the fact that an error has occurred in the retry operation is notified. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

In the main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information, the main control program sends it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs retry operation error notification processing for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." and "Please check the harness of the payout control board." Twice.) Repeatedly flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88 to notify the clerk of the hall. Upon hearing the error notification announcement of this retry operation, the store clerk or the like in the hall has a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. A defect or the like can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs a cancellation setting process (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is the segment display already mounted on the payout control board 951, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept at HI, that is, the activated state is maintained, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via the. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is abnormally operating is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED indicator 860b has already been displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for informing that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above is "normal". The information in which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed is forcibly overwritten. Also, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept at HI, that is, the state is raised, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal board 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operated is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicates the internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 in the processing of step S786 of the same processing, the external factor is triggered. When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is triggered by this, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM to clear the error. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation control switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is subjected to main processing on the main control side from the time the power is turned on. Instead, for a predetermined time until the start, instead of the operation unit for demonstrating the RAM clear function for starting the initialization of the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) Functioning as. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the payout operation of the game ball after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is a person who is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he/she remembers the position of the operation switch 954 on the rear surface of the gaming machine, it can be changed according to the timing of operating this operation switch 954. If a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the function to release the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball is exerted, while depending on the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated, the predetermined amount has been set since the power was turned on. Within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of dealing with the error and appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The player can resume the game before the player loses the motivation for the game.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls for 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and for the amount of money, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out twice) is used as the number of lent balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the ball. 165 is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that notifies that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 165(d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, and as PRDY, a game ball lending device connection terminal Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player operates the ball lending button 328, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal is the TDS shown in FIG. 125. It is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display plate 365 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. 165(a), BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a as a BRDY signal.

In the payout control MPU 952a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program, as shown in FIG. 165(b), changes from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. By the time the set amount of time elapses, a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc. in one payout operation. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money.) Whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

The CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, as shown in FIG. 165(b). ), the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls etc. by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 165(c), when the BRQ signal rises from timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 952a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, 20 ms±1 ms is set), the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the start-up state is held and the payout control MPU 952a is transmitted in order to notify that one payout operation is started. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

The CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (from 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H3, as shown in FIG. 165(b).
), the BRQ which is started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held. (Timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 165(c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). The predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen, is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with its logic being set to LOW, that is, held in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H5).

Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the number of game balls out of the number of 200 yen balls as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls, FIG. ), the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from timing H5, BRQ, from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It outputs to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via 869, and raises and holds the signal (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU 952a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls as the number of lent balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 165(c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with the logic set to LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and is used as EXS to connect to a lending device such as a game ball. Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 rises from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (set to 268 ms at maximum in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H7, as shown in FIG. 165(a). The BRDY that has been raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. 151. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

Note that the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is in communication, when the ball is out of the ball, the ball is caught, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, or the like occurs. 165 (when the logic is LOW, that is, when it is held falling), as shown in FIG. 165(d), the PRDY signal that was started and held from timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state of falling. The output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it is held rising), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is performed. It is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) when the logic HI is maintained.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, and the payout control MPU 952a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the lent number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. Note that a setting staff (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to lend, and the upper plate 321 or the like. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount of money, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 controls the BRQ of the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 of the CR unit 6 even after the above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 951 and the signal is not raised, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, and the CR unit 6 connects the game ball or other lending device. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the output is sent to the payout control board 951 via the terminal board 869 and the signal is not lowered, or when the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has elapsed. The CR unit 6 outputs the signal to the payout control board 951 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the signal is not raised, or even if the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above elapses. Is output to the payout control board 951 from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and when the signal is not dropped, the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS are used to set the BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 165(e) and (f), the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and then a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms±1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is held. Output from the output terminal of, and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J1 to fall to HI after a lapse of a predetermined period JB (200 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls (timing J2). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J2 to LOW after a predetermined period JC (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls or the like (timing J3). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J3 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J4 to LOW after a predetermined period JE (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being held in a lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J5 to HI after the lapse of a predetermined period JF (10000 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5. That is, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing J6). ).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 174. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 168 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 171 is a flowchart of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 172 is a flow chart showing an example, FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing an example of connection failure determination processing, FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal.

As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control section V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control section power failure notice signal interrupt processing, and LOCKN signal. The history creation process, the connection failure determination process, and the connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection failure determination process and the connection restoration process are performed when the peripheral control unit power is turned on, which will be described later. It is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. The order is set to V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, the effect backup information (1fr) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb thereof. ) Is compared, and the production backup information (1 ms) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents 127, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), is copied back to perform a hot start, while the compared content does not match (that is, , 0), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, for cold start.

Further, in the hot start/cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127, effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set as the game board. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after the current time information acquisition processing is performed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not.
By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is used. This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port. When continuous transmission of serial I/O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. Then, via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED to write the data. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 in which various information acquired is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is game effected. Whether or not to reflect in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a by the display data creation process described later is generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled.
This makes it possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but so-called frame drop occurs, but by the lamp data output processing of step S1012, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs, and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and a sound data output process described later from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 to various effects. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of a notification sound and a notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, not only the music and the effect sound according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but also the notification sound and the notification sound are stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to print.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the beginning to the emission data of various LEDs. The pointer is updated in order to instruct whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the top drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later is generated. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own process is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so that the drive data that should be originally instructed is instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received from the command are analyzed by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving unit) described later (command analyzing unit). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound. Generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the production control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and special winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, which shows the contents of full tank shown in FIG. 144, It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands shown in FIG. 143 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into jackpot-related, and power-on. Various commands, various commands classified as general figure synchronized effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effect-related, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 144, and door frame opening command described above , Status display such as door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 144. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, on the game board side. A performance display device 1600 (production device), a door frame side production display device 460 (production device), a lamp (production device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the game state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit that is acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the emission data is arranged in time series to form the emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. In addition, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by being extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create the sprite data to produce the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6.
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data in which the sound data is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. The output to the IC 1512c allows music and sound effects to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when there is a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is committing an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the backup target of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is displayed for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The performance information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are copied in sequence by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 becomes the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are continuously copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511dc. All are sequentially copied from the start address of the (SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the V blank signal VDP 1512a inputting the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 seconds per second, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 is accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S16), as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be executed as the peripheral control unit steady process in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is notified that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1, and the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. In step S1038 of the closing process (peripheral control unit steady process), the value 0 is set to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166 next time. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of which the processing has been omitted is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 166. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 168. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 seconds per second, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32nd 1ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. When the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 126. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port. When continuous transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is set. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 is performed. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the amplifier board side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is written to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port by writing and transferring to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. The data is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown at 127. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is stored). This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the operation (Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. 127. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. 127 is generated. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral MRAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. , A signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency and the occurrence state of the failure between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is this routine every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, as effect backup information (1 ms), in the backup first area 1511 cb, in the areas of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 becomes a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and change the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1ms), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. 1 ms) is copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is within the period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value 1 is set, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period during which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a rasp environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the 1st byte of the above and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are shown in FIG. 127. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. Stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal executed when the power outage notification signal (peripheral power outage notification signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 first activates the 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and the power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time when the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are converted into Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. However, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and are specified in Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Then, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specifies the copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to this point are all copied in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. By specifying copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are predetermined. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 166 is restarted.

As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the power outage notification signal is not continuously input and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and thus the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the endless loop in the determination of S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 168 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 illustrated in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126, as shown in FIG. 171, is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal that has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the receiver frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Remembered

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , A request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d which is not abnormal data. Predetermined data for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504).
In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 is shifted bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, this LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. Is a signal output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 126, and is “00001111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are in a state of being defective in the connection, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative count. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is not reached, the value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a problem with the transmitter. Value is 1 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the running state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, each value is set to 0. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is restored to the value at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166 will be described. In this connection recovery processing, which is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 172, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166 as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data. First, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated. When the effect is completed according to the data and the updating of all the pointers is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and display the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or during the customer waiting state, not during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simply in the waiting state for the customer), This routine is finished as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect has been completed and the pointers have all been updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 172 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It does (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state, the number of times is not 1 On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542 while ending the routine, that is, the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is even once. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has a problem has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby producing the door frame side effect included in the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the communication error display process is executed. (Step S1548), and this routine is completed. In this communication error display processing, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is provided in order to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. The process of drawing is performed. For example, a message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, in the communication error display processing, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to each other, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 causes LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is considered that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is notified to that effect. The display sound is displayed in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, and a notification sound (for example, "a malfunction has occurred in the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, a process of turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. The peripheral control of the peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. 166. The variable display of the effect design is executed by the unit steady process, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 147 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123. The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148, or the second shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the starting opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of times (round number) of opening/closing operations of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is designed to be exhausted, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

From the main control board 1310, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is obtained. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left side production symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 and the central production symbol is on the center. Then, the variable display of the right effect design is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left effect design, the central effect design, and the right effect design is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The player can recognize the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left effect design, the center effect design, and the right effect design are variably displayed, the left effect effect design, the center effect effect, and the right effect effect are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left effect effect is displayed. From the upper left side of the area to the lower left side, the central effect design is from the upper center of the display area to the central lower side, and the right effect design is from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side. When the left effect design, the center effect design, and the right effect design are stopped and displayed while being variably displayed in an imaginary manner, the left effect effect design, the center effect effect, and the right effect effect that are stopped are displayed. The left effect design, the center effect design, and the right effect design are in an opaque form so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, with the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable display start and stop on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left side effect symbol, the center effect symbol, and the right side effect symbol, which are variably displayed and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002, or the second special drawing by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 174, the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left effect design, the central effect design, and the right effect design is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Since the pointer is updated in order to instruct which of the screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the data, that is, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, according to the screen generation schedule data. Because the production is proceeding, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left production symbol, the central demonstration symbol, and the right demonstration symbol is started. Until the stop display is performed, even if the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 173 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166. The routine is forcibly ended as it is in the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process.

Thereby, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left effect symbol, the center effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started and stopped, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if the number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection with the receiver) is once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not processed. The process for recovering the connection with the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The LCD display device has a problem. Please call the store clerk." is not displayed, so it is reported that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started and stopped (timing K1), the peripheral controller power supply shown in FIG. 166 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated in the scheduler update process, the peripheral controller power-on shown in FIG. 166 is turned on. When the determination in step S1540 in the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 173, which is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is not once, the routine is ended as it is, while the communication check counter is terminated. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail during the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the connection is being made (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." It is designed to perform a process of notifying, and the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is valid is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is displayed again. In the interval period until the start, since the left effect design, the central effect design, and the right effect design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect When the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble When the cumulative number of times determined to be equal to has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by performing the SYNC pattern output process without fail, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is performed. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the store clerk." is displayed to notify.

When the variable display of the left effect design, the center effect design, and the right effect design is started again (timing K2), since the screen generation schedule data is being activated as described above, the left effect effect design, the center effect effect design. , And until the right effect design is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 times. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Without performing the communication error display processing in step S1548, for example, the message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left effect design, the central effect design, and the right effect design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left effect effect design, the central effect effect, and the right effect effect are displayed again. In the interval period until the variable display of the symbols is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started and stopped, the transmitter for door frame side effect is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left effect design, the center effect design, and the right effect design stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and is profitable to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the big hit game state to be given occurs, the left side effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left effect symbol, the central effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed properly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes a state in which drawing is not possible, rather than performing the process in the middle of the process and recovering to a state in which it can be correctly drawn, the left side effect design, the center effect design, and the display effect of the game board side effect display device 1600 By stopping and displaying the right effect design, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or waiting for a customer. In the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case where it is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the differential signal is generated as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the digitizing circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally, As described above, since the signal format output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is different from that of the data format, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is output to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the control MPU 1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not failed when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and causes the effect display drive board 4450 to perform the operation. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a problem with the effect display drive board 4450 that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And display a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the plate side. Please call the store clerk.") by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. By outputting to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source while outputting to the 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") that notifies that is output. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the compulsory switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit connection is made so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460 because a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 173 as the notification process when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is defective. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. Before the player plays the game, the clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, and the check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that it is a signal output to convey that fact, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver included in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image due to communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that the drawn data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to start the connection confirmation signal. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the defect. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which notifies that there is a communication failure between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which a LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. It is an image that conveys that the message "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is generated, and this generated image is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It can be displayed and notified.
In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early discovers a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication, and notifies the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect, and Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall, etc., or can directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. will have the trouble. It is possible to start work for solving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in a defective state even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate a communication failure between image communication To the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. , Can output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, the communication failure can be solved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side included in the effect display drive board 4450. Even if the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communication is set. A door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d transmits a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to notify the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and the game. The output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped when the execution of the process is restarted, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d stops when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It is like this. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not being executed, it is possible to move toward the direction where the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display 1405 in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device to start the variation. Only while the game is not proceeding, while the connection confirmation signal is being repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is fluctuated and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the progress of the game again and ends it (every time period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2), it can be directed toward the elimination direction.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 123 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start opening 2002 and a second start which are start areas in which the game balls, which are shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 123, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on having entered the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize command shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), which is a payout command from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU 952a of 124 is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about games even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 shown in FIG.
When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 131 for the purpose of outputting the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and operating during the period when the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 149 is performed after the power is turned on. Then, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and turning on the power. From the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed (or the period of time when the determination process of step S512 is performed in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 149 from the power-on) When it is operated after the lapse of time, the payout control microprocessor does not output the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error canceling signal for canceling the error that has occurred in the payout device 830. It also has an error canceling function of outputting to a certain payout control MPU 952a.

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is played. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 131 for erasing the information regarding is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and the determination processing of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. The RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout related information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when operated within a predetermined period. Functions and period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed from the power-on time (or the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 149 from the power-on time) When the operation is performed after the elapse of the period), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor as an error cancellation signal for canceling the error that occurs in the payout device 830. Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error canceling function, can be respectively operated by one operation switch 954. 1 can be provided. Therefore, the RAM clearing function and the error clearing function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 is various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor here, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball that has been driven into the game area, and the flow down state of the game ball is manipulated as desired to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by voice. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 175 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS includes, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is not detected, and outputs a voltage when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected. It does not (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is off, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the pull-up resistor IR0 and also to one end of the resistor IR1, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 as well as one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and applied with +12V. Further, the detection circuit portion 4164 is a circuit which is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also increased to +12V (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the table form in FIG. 179. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact portion terminal of the connector member.In the case of the bellows contact type, pulling the harness attached to the connector member at the time of connection work etc. It is easier to open the gap than the type. If the gap is opened, dust or the like will easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance similarly occurs. For example, when playing right-handed, when a large amount of game balls are continuously concentrated and flow down, vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, causing slight sliding wear. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation of will be described. For example, in FIG. 175, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. The size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Will be lifted. In FIG. 175, a connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, and thus a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 176 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the special winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it is present between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is exerted. The voltage raising unit 4166 for avoiding the above is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example including a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection portion. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In addition, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected. It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS portion is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12V. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the state is such an abnormal state, in the above example, when it is determined that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU1310a is in the vicinity. Processing such as transmitting an error command to the control unit 1511 and outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, a sound and the like of the abnormality.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 176, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector section. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

Note that, as in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the error command sent by the magnet. It informs by game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side effect display device 460, warning indicator, voice, etc. that an illegal game action using is performed or that magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken. To do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 177 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 175, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310. The input circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end grounded. It is configured to include a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 175, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, the second embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 is composed of the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which the other end of +12V is applied and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the detection circuit section 4164. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor 4024 is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12V.

Further, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 of the pull-up resistor IR0. A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, the potential difference generated across the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 177, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor by causing a current to flow in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current also flows through the second resistor IR3 to ground. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current of a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage drops to about ground, and the second resistor IR3 is grounded. Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 178 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the same as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5.
Compared with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, the third embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 is composed of the resistors IR4 and IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the latter stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while being connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off and the transistor ITR2 also turns off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12V.

In addition, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, the potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the latter transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. When the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 178, the connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current also flows to the ground through the resistors IR4 and IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit are kept off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Even when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the detection circuit unit 4164 is similarly turned on by turning on the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the provided voltage output units 4163 are provided in a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercially available product, TOSHIBA company). Manufactured by the company).

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor by various sensors, for example, various sensors, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.
[17-1-1. Fluctuation pattern]

Next, the effect in this embodiment will be described. The variation pattern table is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol in the main control board 1310 (the winning result, the variation time, etc.), and the special figure executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310. It is a table that manages the pattern of the synchronized effect (effect pattern variation pattern). Special figure synchronization effect corresponds to the variation of the special symbol which relates to the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (based on the symbol synchronization effect start command), the peripheral control board 1510 is on the game board side. Effects such as displaying effect symbols on the effect display device 1600 in a variable manner or displaying characters are included. Further, it is possible to include effects such as operating a movable accessory, illuminating a light-emitting body such as a lamp, or outputting sound from various speakers while the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. The effects corresponding to the variation pattern of the present embodiment include a pseudo continuous effect described later. In addition, a variation pattern over a plurality of variation display games may be defined. Various effects are adapted to select from the fluctuation pattern table an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The fluctuation pattern selection means, the start opening winning command is transmitted by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be drawn, and the first starting opening 2002 and the second The length of the special variation time, etc. which suggests to the player the special lottery result that has been drawn upon the acceptance of the game ball in the starting opening 2004 over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) is selected. Any one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is selected by, for example, a lottery based on random numbers of the fluctuation patterns and a predetermined distribution table. The variation pattern of this special symbol is referred to as a basis when the peripheral control board 1510 selects various effect contents developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like. In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern of the selected special symbol, the effect symbol executed in the game board side effect display device 1600 (three-digit effect symbol displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600) is used. At least a part of the effect contents is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. The effect symbol of the present embodiment is displayed over the variation time of the special symbol, and during the period in which the effect using the effect symbol is performed, the first half is the notice effect period and is set after the notice effect period. The second half is the reach production section. In the notice effect section, the effect symbols are displayed in various modes, and the effect patterns (display patterns) thereof are roughly classified into two types: a pseudo continuous effect pattern and other normal effect patterns. The pseudo continuous effect pattern is an execution pattern of the pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop and the re-change of the effect symbol are performed a plurality of times (for example, 3 times) during the variation display of the special symbol once. Further, the normal effect pattern is a pattern in which, during the variable display of one special symbol, the effect symbol is not temporarily stopped and re-varied until the reach effect is reached. Regardless of whether the pseudo continuous effect pattern or the normal effect pattern is performed, the final stop timing of the effect symbol matches the timing at which the special symbol stops.

Next, the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment will be described. As described above, the pseudo continuous effect is a kind of effect content using effect symbols that are performed in the notice effect section, and is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 during one change of the special symbol. It is an effect in which temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbols of all digits occur once or a plurality of times. The pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment is set such that the larger the number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol (the number of pseudo continuous times), the longer the time and the higher the expectation for the big hit.
In addition, in the present embodiment, in the period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the period until the first temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the effect symbol occurs is the “first pseudo period”, and the first pseudo period ends. From the second, the period until the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the second effect design is the second pseudo period, and after the second pseudo period ends, the temporary stop and re-variation of the third effect design occurs. The period up to is referred to as a third pseudo period, and the period until the reach effect is executed after the third pseudo period is ended is referred to as a fourth pseudo period.
If the number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect design is 1, the execution period of the pseudo continuous effect is "first pseudo period + period until reach effect execution", the number of temporary stop and re-change of the effect design If it is twice, the execution period of the pseudo continuous production is "first pseudo period + second pseudo period + period until reach production execution", and if the number of temporary stop and re-variation of the production symbol is three times, The execution period of the pseudo continuous production is “first pseudo period+second pseudo period+third pseudo period+reach production execution period”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, a plurality of types (23 types in the present embodiment) in which the number of re-variation of the effect design is different as the execution pattern of the pseudo continuous effect performed up to the reach effect section. Pseudo continuous effect patterns "pseudo B1" to "pseudo B23" are provided, and other than that, the normal variation pattern is "normal A1".

Further, the pseudo continuous effect of the present embodiment, when all the three-digit effect symbols displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 temporarily stop and change again, the final stop symbol of the three-digit effect symbols. In the display area in which is displayed, "pseudo-relational pattern (pseudo-relational pattern that indicates the occurrence and continuation of pseudo continuous production)" that indicates that all three-digit effect symbols are changed again is to be displayed. For example, when the pseudo continuous effect is generated or continues, among the three effect symbols that are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of left, right, and middle, "left effect symbol (in this embodiment, referred to as "left symbol"). )” and “right production design (referred to as “right design” in this embodiment)” are not the same, that is, stop in a manner that does not form a reach, and then the third stop design “in When the effect symbol (referred to as "middle symbol" in the present embodiment)" is stopped, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed by being superimposed on the medium symbol. When this pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, re-variation of the effect symbol is executed with a probability of 100% (an example of a predetermined probability). When the pseudo continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed by being superimposed on the medium symbol, the re-variation of the effect symbol is not executed. If the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the effect symbol is changed again at least once. Therefore, in the pseudo continuous effect pattern of this embodiment, the pseudo continuous symbol is always stopped and displayed in the first pseudo period. Included in the period. It should be noted that it is possible to separately provide a case where the effect symbol is re-varied without the pseudo continuous symbol being stopped and displayed.

The pseudo continuous production pattern, which is one of various productions, is performed by the main control MPU 1310a built in the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball hit by the player in the game area enters the starting opening. It is set according to the selected variation pattern.
The contents of the variation pattern set based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182(A) and 182(B). FIG. 182(A) is a deviation variation pattern table showing an example of variation patterns at the time of deviation. FIG. 182(B) is a jackpot variation pattern table showing an example of variation patterns at the time of a jackpot. The pachinko machine 1 is configured to be able to set a variation pattern corresponding to various game states (time saving state, etc.) in addition to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 182(A) and 182(B).

When the result of the lottery is out of alignment, the variation pattern is based on the out-of-range variation pattern table of FIG. 182(A), variation without reach, normal reach variation, a plurality of SP1 reach variation with different variation time, different variation time. One variation pattern is set from a plurality of SP2 reach variations and a plurality of SP3 reach variations having different variation times.

In the outlier variation pattern table, in the order of reachless variation, normal reach variation, SP1 reach variation, SP2 reach variation, SP3 reach variation, the probability of selection is set to be low and the variation time is set to be long. The variation patterns of the SP1 reach variation, the SP2 reach variation, and the SP3 reach variation are set such that the variation time becomes longer as the number of pseudo-continuous times increases.

On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, various commands classified as jackpot-related are transmitted from the main control board, and the variation pattern is a normal reach variation based on the jackpot variation pattern table of FIG. 182(B). One variation pattern is set from a plurality of SP1 reach variations having different variation times, a plurality of SP2 reach variations having different variation times, and a plurality of SP3 reach variations having different variation times.

In the jackpot variation pattern table, the selectivity is set to increase in the order of normal reach variation, SP1 reach variation, SP2 reach variation, and SP3 reach variation. It should be noted that, since the premium reach variation is so-called “excited heat”, which has a very high expectation that it will be a big hit, the selectivity rate of the premium reach variation is set to be the lowest. The variation time is set to be longer in the order of normal reach variation, SP1 reach variation, SP2 reach variation, SP3 reach variation, and premium reach variation.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the pseudo continuous effect within the time allotted for performing the pseudo continuous effect in the set variation pattern (the previously described notice effect section). Instead of the continuous production, another production (movie notice, etc.) may be executed.

In the variation patterns 4, 8, 17, and 21 in the deviation variation pattern table and the jackpot variation pattern table described above, the number of re-variations of the effect symbol in the pseudo continuous effect is once (the total variation including the initial variation and the re-variation). The number of times is set to 2 times, and in the variation patterns 5, 9, 12, 18, 22, and 25, the number of re-variations of the effect symbol in the pseudo continuous effect is two times (total variation including the initial variation and the re-variation). The number of times is set to 3 times, and in the variation patterns 6, 10, 13, 14, 19, 23, 26, and 27, the number of re-variations of the effect symbol in the pseudo continuous production is three times (the initial variation and the re-variation). The total number of fluctuations is set to 4).

In the fluctuation pattern in which it is not decided to execute the pseudo continuous effect, the effect symbol stops without temporary stop (main stop) from the start of fluctuation until the special symbol stops, but the main stop immediately after the temporary stop. It may be done. In such a case, the number of re-variations of the effect symbol in the pseudo continuous production can be regarded as a variation pattern of 0 (the total number of variations of the initial variation and the re-variation is 1).

In the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect, and the reach type by lottery or the like for the effect, or the fluctuation pattern. According to the above, the presence/absence of execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous number of times, and the reach type are associated in advance, and the peripheral control board 1510 determines the presence/absence of the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous number of times, and the reach type in accordance with the content defined by the variation pattern. It may be specified.

Further, the expectation level for the jackpot may be suggested not only by the number of times of pseudo continuous production in the pseudo continuous production, but also by suggesting to the player in a production mode in the pseudo continuous production. By performing the pseudo continuous effect of the present embodiment described below, conventionally, what only suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit depending on how many times the fluctuation of the effect design by the pseudo continuous effect is repeated, the pseudo continuous Since it is possible to direct the interest to the production contents themselves of the production, the range of ways of enjoying the pseudo continuous production is widened and the interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in addition to indicating the high degree of expectation for the jackpot by the number of times of pseudo continuous in the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the above-mentioned "pseudo continuous pattern (pseudo continuous pattern that suggests the occurrence and continuation of the pseudo continuous effect)" It is also shown depending on the mode. As the pseudo-relational pattern of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 185, a plurality of types of pseudo-relational patterns composed of different character images (in addition to the type of three-digit effect design (effect design showing numbers)) In this embodiment, three types are provided.

The pseudo continuous symbol is a symbol which is superimposed and displayed on the middle symbol when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous effect. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which, of the three effect symbols that stop in the order of left, right, and middle, the pseudo effect symbol is superimposed and displayed on the effect symbol in the middle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and You may make it superimpose a pseudo continuous design on the right production design.

The pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 183 is a pseudo continuous symbol imitating a fighter (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo continuous symbol 1”). The pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 184 is a pseudo continuous symbol imitating a tank (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo continuous symbol 2”). The pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 185 is a pseudo continuous symbol imitating a warship (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo continuous symbol 3”).
The degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher in the order of the pseudo continuous symbol 1, the pseudo continuous symbol 2, and the pseudo continuous symbol 3, and in the series of pseudo continuous effects, the type of the pseudo continuous symbol displayed immediately before the re-change of the effect symbol. Depending on the configuration, expectations are different.

For example, when performing a pseudo continuous production in which the effect symbol is changed again three times, for example, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is displayed in the first pseudo period, then the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is displayed in the second pseudo period, and then. In the third pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern 2 is displayed, and thereafter, the production symbol is stopped without the pseudo-relational symbol being displayed, and when the pseudo-relational production is executed in the pseudo continuous production pattern, the special symbol is stopped. The pseudo continuous pattern displayed immediately before is the pseudo continuous pattern 2.
On the other hand, in the case of executing the pseudo continuous effect which also changes three times, that is, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is displayed in the first pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is then displayed in the second pseudo period, and then the third pseudo period. In the period, the pseudo-relational pattern 3 is displayed, and thereafter, the production symbol is stopped without displaying the pseudo-relational symbol, when the pseudo-relational production is executed in the pseudo-continuous production pattern, just before the special symbol is stopped. The displayed pseudo continuous pattern is the pseudo continuous pattern 3.
Comparing the pseudo continuous production of both, the number of pseudo continuous is the same, but the type of pseudo continuous symbol displayed immediately before the production design is stopped permanently, in this case, just before the production design is stopped permanently The latter pseudo continuous effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous pattern 3 is displayed has a higher expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the expectation for the jackpot is different depending on the type of the pseudo-relational pattern displayed immediately before the effect design is stopped, so that the effect design is changed three times, for example. In the pseudo continuous production, in the case where the pseudo-relational pattern displayed immediately before the production symbol is main stopped is the pseudo-relational pattern 2 and in the pseudo-continuous production in which the production symbol is changed again twice, immediately before the production symbol is permanently stopped. When the displayed pseudo-relational pattern is compared with the case of the pseudo-relational pattern 3, the latter pseudo-continuous effect has a higher expectation for the big hit even if the number of re-variations is small. In the present embodiment, the number of times the effect symbols are changed again (the number of times of pseudo continuation) is different from each other in the pseudo continuous effect, and when the effect symbols displayed immediately before the final stop of the effect symbols are the same, the effect is produced. The pseudo continuous effect pattern in which the number of times the pattern is changed again (the number of pseudo continuous times) is large has a structure in which the expectation for the jackpot is high.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the expectation degree for the big hit is different depending on the type of the pseudo continuous symbol displayed immediately before the stop of the effect symbol, not the pseudo continuous number, but it is not limited to this and the pseudo continuous symbol is not limited thereto. The degree of expectation of the jackpot may be different for both the type of the symbol and the number of times of pseudo continuous, for example, the pseudo continuous symbol displayed immediately before the effect symbol is once stopped and the production symbol is pseudo. If it is a continuous symbol 1, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the lowest, the pseudo continuous number is 3 times, and if the pseudo continuous symbol displayed immediately before the final stop of the production pattern is the pseudo continuous symbol 3, it is against the big hit. It is good also as a structure which multiplies the expectation degree of both the kind of pseudo continuous symbol and the pseudo continuous frequency so that the expectation degree is the highest. As a result, the player's attention points for the pseudo continuous effect can be spread over a wider range, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment is executed, when the stop symbol of the effect symbol includes a predetermined pseudo continuous symbol, for example, among the three effect symbols which are stopped in the order of left, right, and middle. , When the pseudo continuous symbol is superimposed and displayed on the middle symbol which is the final stop symbol, the stopped pseudo continuous symbol is changed to another pseudo continuous symbol before the re-changing of the next effect symbol is executed. It may change. More specifically, when the middle symbol stops (temporarily stops) in the first pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is superimposed and displayed as stopped. Then, before the transition to the second pseudo period, a display is switched (changed) from the pseudo continuous symbol 1 to, for example, the pseudo continuous symbol 2. Then, the pseudo continuous symbol after the change is displayed, the first pseudo period is ended, and then the second pseudo period is started. That is, in the first pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern is promoted from the pseudo-relational pattern 1 to the pseudo-relational pattern 2 having a higher degree of expectation. As a result, in the pseudo continuous production, after the pseudo continuous design is stopped, the pseudo continuous design is switched to a higher expectation and the pseudo continuous production is generated, and it is possible to make the player expect whether or not to continue, and further pseudo It is possible to enhance the interest in continuous production.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment, after the pseudo-relational pattern is temporarily stopped in this pseudo-period, promotion promotion effect (described later) for inspiring whether or not to be promoted to a pseudo-relational pattern with higher expectation is executed. There are cases where
In addition, as a case where the pseudo-relational pattern is promoted, there are a case where the promotion is performed after performing the promotion fanning effect, and a case where the promotion is performed without executing the promotion fanning effect.

The number of times the promotion promotion effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. In the variation patterns 8 to 21, 21 to 23, the execution frequency is executed once in any pseudo period in the series of pseudo continuous productions, and the variation pattern. In 12, 13, 25, 26, the pseudo patterns are executed twice in any pseudo period in the series of pseudo continuous effects, and in the variation patterns 14, 27, they are executed in all pseudo periods in the series of pseudo continuous effects.

In addition, the promotion promotion effect in this embodiment is provided when the pseudo-relational pattern is executed and when it is not executed, but as another configuration, for example, when the pseudo-relational pattern is displayed. May be always executed.

Next, the pseudo continuous effect pattern that is randomly selected according to the variation pattern determined based on the various commands transmitted from the determined main control board 1310 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a pseudo continuous effect pattern table selected by the peripheral control board 1510.
In the pseudo continuous production pattern table, the number of re-changes of the production symbols in a series of pseudo continuous productions (the number of pseudo continuous productions), the number of executions of the promotion fan production in a series of pseudo continuous productions, and the pseudo continuous design currently displayed Is set the number of times to switch to a pseudo-relational pattern with high expectations for jackpots (promotion number).
In the variation pattern, the number of re-variation of the effect symbol and the number of times of promotion of promotion are set, so that the pseudo continuous effect pattern corresponding to them is selected.
For example, when the variation pattern 5 is selected from the variation patterns, the temporary stop and re-variation number of the effect symbol is “2” (the third pseudo period is the main variation), and the promotion incline effect is not executed. Therefore, one of the pseudo B2, 5, and 6 is selected from the pseudo continuous effect patterns shown in the figure.

Further, in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 181, regarding the probability that a variation pattern in which promotion promotion is executed is selected, if the winning result is out of proportion, the probability of selection is low, and conversely if the winning result is a big hit. Has a higher probability of being selected than the outlier case. In other words, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher when the promotion-raising effect is executed than when it is not executed. In other words, the fact that the promotion fanning effect itself is performed is an effect that suggests that there is a high probability that it is a big hit, so despite the promotion fanning effect being executed, the pseudo-relational pattern currently displayed Even if you do not switch to a pseudo-relational pattern that has high expectations for jackpots, you can continue to expect players that they may be a jackpot, so prevent a decline in interest in the game You can do it.

Next, in the pseudo continuous effect pattern table shown in FIG. 181, the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern selected by lot according to the selected pseudo continuous effect pattern will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188.
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a first pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table that is selected in the case where promotion of promotion and pseudo-relational symbol promotion is not executed.
187 is a diagram showing a second pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table selected when the pseudo-relational symbol promotion is executed without the promotion of promotion being executed.
FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating a third pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table selected when both promotion of promotion and pseudo-relational symbol promotion are executed.
In the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern table, it is set which pseudo-relational symbol is displayed by the variation of each production symbol in a series of pseudo-continuous production. It is set whether the pattern is promoted.

In each of the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern tables shown in FIGS. 186 to 188, is the pseudo continuous effect pattern determined in the pseudo continuous effect pattern table set whether or not promotion of promotion and promotion of pseudo continuous symbol is executed? The table to be selected has a different structure depending on whether or not it is used.
If the selected pseudo continuous production pattern is one in which promotion of promotion related to pseudo continuous symbols and promotion of pseudo continuous symbols are not executed, select a pseudo continuous production pattern from the first pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table of FIG. 186. It is supposed to do.
If the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern is one in which promotion of pseudo-related symbols is not executed and pseudo-relational pattern promotion is executed, from the second pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table of FIG. 187. A pseudo continuous production pattern is selected.
If the selected pseudo continuous effect pattern is to promote the pseudo-relational pattern, regardless of whether or not the promotion-inclination effect related to the pseudo-relational pattern is executed, the third pseudo-relational pattern display pattern of FIG. 188 A pseudo continuous production pattern is selected from the table.

In addition, "pseudo 1" shown in the first to third pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table corresponds to the pseudo continuous symbol 1, "pseudo 2" corresponds to the pseudo continuous symbol 2, and "pseudo 3" is the pseudo continuous symbol 3 It corresponds to.

Further, for example, when the variation pattern 17 is selected from among the variation patterns, the temporary stop and re-variation number of the effect symbol is one time (the second pseudo period is the main variation), and the promotion curse effect is not executed. Therefore, the pseudo continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 181 is selected from either pseudo B1 or pseudo B4.
When the pseudo B1 is selected, since the promotion promotion effect and the pseudo continuous symbol promotion are patterns that are not executed, the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is selected from the first pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table, and the pseudo B4 is selected. Since the promotion effect is not executed, the pseudo-relational symbol promotion is executed, so the pseudo-relational symbol display pattern is selected from the second pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table. Here, it is assumed that the pseudo B4 is selected.

The number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect image of the pseudo B4 is once (the second pseudo period becomes the main variation), promotion promotion effect is not executed, and pseudo continuous symbol promotion is a pattern to be executed once. Therefore, any one of the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns 82 to 84 in the second pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table is selected.

For example, when the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern 82 is selected, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo period. Since "pseudo 1→2" is displayed in the field of the first pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is promoted and the pseudo continuous symbol 2 is displayed, so that the pseudo pseudo symbol 2 moves (re-changes) to the second pseudo period. Before, the effect (pseudo continuous symbol promotion) of replacing the displayed pseudo continuous symbol 1 with the pseudo continuous symbol 2 is executed. Then, the next second pseudo period starts.

As a specific flow of the effect, when the game ball hit by the player wins in the starting opening, the main control board 1310 transmits a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect. Then, the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect is selected based on that, and when the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern corresponding to the change pattern are determined, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command or the special figure 2 tuning effect The start command is transmitted, and the variable display of the three effect symbols displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600: left, right, and inside is started. Immediately after that, a special symbol 1 designation command or a special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 189(A), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally, as a middle symbol, a fighter plane. The “pseudo-relational pattern 1” imitating is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 189(B) to (C), "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is rotated about the up-down direction as a correspondence that "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is promoted to "pseudo-relational pattern 2". As shown in FIG. 189(D), a “pseudo-relational pattern 2” imitating a tank is displayed.

As described above, not only is the pseudo-relational pattern displayed as the middle symbol, but the pseudo-relational pattern promotion that switches to the pseudo-reciprocal symbol having a higher degree of expectation from there is simply displayed as the pseudo-relational pattern. Compared with this, since it is possible to give the player a higher expectation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for example, when the variation pattern 25 is selected from the variation patterns, the number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect design is twice (the third pseudo period becomes the main variation), and promotion promotion effect is performed twice. Since it is the pattern to be executed, one of the pseudo B13 to B15 is selected from the pseudo continuous effect patterns shown in FIG. 181.
In addition, since the pseudo B13 to B15 are patterns in which the promotion effect is executed, the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is selected from the third pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table.

For example, when the pseudo B13 is selected from the pseudo continuous effect pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation number of the effect symbol of the pseudo B13 are executed twice (the third pseudo period becomes the main fluctuation), and promotion promotion is performed twice. The pattern is executed and the pseudo-relational pattern promotion is not executed. Therefore, the pseudo-relational symbol display pattern 26 or the pseudo-relational symbol display pattern 32 in the third pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table is selected.

When the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern 26 is selected, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo period. Next, before the transition (re-fluctuation) to the second pseudo period, the promotion fan effect is executed. Since "pseudo 1→1" is shown in the column of the first pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is not promoted, and the final pseudo continuous symbol in the first pseudo period is displayed as the pseudo continuous symbol 1. , The next second pseudo period starts. In the same manner in the second pseudo period, since "Pseudo 1→1" is displayed in the column of the second pseudo period, after the pseudo continuous symbol 1 is temporarily stopped and displayed, promotion promotion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous period is executed. The symbol 1 shifts to the third pseudo period without being promoted. Since the temporary stop and re-variation number of the effect symbol in the variation pattern 25 are two times, the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed in the third pseudo period, and the predetermined reach effect is executed.

Further, when one pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns by the peripheral control board 1510, such as a pseudo continuous effect pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern display pattern, the variation pattern selected at that time is selected depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit. The proportion of patterns that are played is different.
First, the selection ratio of the pseudo continuous effect pattern will be described. For example, if the variation pattern 25 described above is taken as an example, the winning result of the variation pattern 25 is a big hit due to the transmission of various commands classified as the big hit related ones. Therefore, when the variation pattern 25 is selected, the lottery is selected. Of the pseudo B13 to B15 in the pseudo continuous production pattern, the pseudo B15 that the pseudo continuous symbol promotion is performed twice has the highest ratio, then the pseudo B14 that the pseudo continuous symbol promotion is performed once, and the pseudo continuous symbol. The probability that the pseudo B13 that is not promoted is selected is the lowest.
On the contrary, if any of the pseudo B13 to B15 is selected and the variation pattern 12 in which the winning result is out of proportion is selected, the ratio of the pseudo B13 in which the pseudo continuous symbol promotion is not performed is the highest, and then The pseudo B14 in which the pseudo symbol promotion is performed once, and the pseudo B15 in which the pseudo symbol promotion is performed twice are selected with the lowest probability.

Next, the selection ratio of the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern will be described. In the same manner for the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern, for example, when the variation pattern 25, which is a big hit, is selected and the pseudo continuous effect pattern pseudo B13 is selected, the expected degree of the displayed pseudo continuous symbol is shown in FIG. 188. The ratio in which the high pseudo continuous symbol display pattern 32 is selected is the highest.
Further, when the variation pattern 12 in which the winning result is out of range is selected and the pseudo continuous production pattern pseudo B13 is selected, the proportion of the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern 26 having a low expectation of the displayed pseudo continuous symbol is selected. Is the highest.

As a result, the player, in a series of pseudo continuous production, how many times the variation of the production symbol is executed, the promotion fan production is executed, and if so, how many times it is executed, the pseudo continuous symbol promotion Is performed, how many times if it is done, whether the pseudo-relational symbol just before the production symbol is stopped is highly expected, etc., etc. Since there are multiple variations of the material for increasing the degree of expectation, it is possible to make each and every one of the productions more enjoyable and to greatly improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the series of pseudo continuous effects in the present embodiment, the fall of the pseudo continuous symbols is not performed. More specifically, for example, it is assumed that the pseudo continuous symbol 2 is displayed in the first pseudo period. Then, when the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the second pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol having the expectation degree of the pseudo continuous symbol 2 or more is always displayed. If, in the second pseudo period, a pseudo continuous pattern with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pseudo continuous pattern displayed in the second pseudo period is displayed, even if the variation of the effect design is repeated continuously Despite this, on the contrary, there is a fear that the degree of expectation has decreased and the interest in the game may be diminished.

Next, an example of a flow of a series of pseudo continuous effects will be described with reference to FIGS.
189 to 192 are diagrams showing an example of a series of pseudo continuous effects executed when it is decided to perform the pseudo continuous effects.
Here, as an example, the pseudo B23, which is a pseudo continuous effect that is executed until the fourth pseudo period (the pseudo continuous number is 3 times), in which promotion promotion effect is performed 3 times and pseudo continuous symbol promotion is performed 2 times is described. To do.

[First pseudo period]
First, as shown in FIG. 190(A), a start opening winning command is transmitted in response to a game ball hit by a player winning the starting opening, and a variation pattern for performing pseudo continuous effect is selected. When the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern corresponding to the variation pattern are determined, the three effects of the left, right, and middle displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 by transmitting the symbol synchronization effect start command. The variable display of symbols is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 190(B) to (C), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally, as the middle symbol, "pseudo continuous symbol 1" imitating a fighter is displayed. Incidentally, in the pseudo B23, the promotion fan effect is executed in all the fluctuations of the effect symbols, so the promotion fan effect is executed before the transition to the second pseudo period.

As shown in FIG. 190(D), when promotion of promotion is executed, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 displayed as a middle symbol is moved and displayed on the right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, also referred to as screen). Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 2 simulating a tank is displayed on the left side of the screen. At this time, in order to carry out the promotion fanning effect on the entire screen, each effect symbol is displayed small in the upper left of the screen. Then, the pseudo-relational pattern 1 shoots a machine gun, the pseudo-repetitive pattern 2 shoots a main gun, and a shooting effect is executed.

When the pattern 70 is selected from the pseudo-relationship pattern display patterns (pattern 70 or 72) corresponding to the pseudo B23, the pseudo-relationship pattern finally displayed in the first pseudo period is “pseudo-relational pattern 1”. Therefore, after the shooting effect, as shown in FIG. 190(E2), an image display as if the “pseudo-relational pattern 2” exploded and was destroyed is displayed. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" has won the shooting effect, and as shown in FIG. 190 (F2), the destroyed "pseudo-relational pattern 2" moves to the outside of the screen, and the shooting effect is produced. The “pseudo-relational symbol 1” that has won is moved to the middle symbol position and displayed, and the effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position and displayed (no promotion). Then, the second pseudo period starts.

If the pattern 72 is selected from among the pseudo-relational pattern display patterns (pattern 70 or 72) corresponding to the pseudo B23, the pseudo-relational pattern finally displayed in the first pseudo period is "pseudo-relational pattern 2". Therefore, after the shooting effect, as shown in FIG. 190(E1), an image display as if "pseudo-relational pattern 1" exploded and was shot down is displayed. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" has won the shooting effect, and the destroyed "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is moved to the outside of the screen as shown in FIG. 190 (F1), and the shooting effect is produced. The “pseudo-relational pattern 2” that has won is moved to the position of the middle symbol and displayed, and the effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position (promotion). Then, as shown in FIG. 190(G), the effect symbol is changed again and the second pseudo period is entered.

[Second pseudo period]
When the pattern 70 is selected from the pseudo-relational pattern display patterns (pattern 70 or 72) corresponding to the pseudo B23, the pseudo-relational pattern finally displayed in the first pseudo period is "pseudo-relational pattern 1". ", and since the pseudo-relational pattern finally displayed in this second pseudo period is "pseudo-relational pattern 2", the above-mentioned "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is promoted to "pseudo-relational pattern 2" (Fig. 190(A), 190(B), 190(C), 190(D), 190(E2), 190(F2), 190(G) ) Is executed to shift to the third pseudo period.

In addition, when the pattern 72 is selected from the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns (pattern 70 or 72) corresponding to the pseudo B23, the pseudo continuous symbol finally displayed in the first pseudo period is "pseudo continuous symbol". The symbol 2" and the pseudo continuous symbol finally displayed in this second pseudo period is the "pseudo continuous symbol 2", so that FIG. 191(A) consecutive to the re-change of FIG. 190(G) was executed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 191(B) to (C), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally, "pseudo continuous symbol 2" is displayed as the middle symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(D), when promotion of promotion is executed, the pseudo-relational pattern 2 displayed as the middle symbol is moved and displayed on the right side of the screen, and the "pseudo-relational symbol 3" simulating a warship is displayed. Is derived and displayed on the left side of the screen. Also at this time, as described above, in order to carry out the promotion fanning effect on the entire screen, each effect symbol is displayed small in the upper left of the screen. Then, the pseudo-relational pattern 2 shoots the main gun, and the pseudo-relational pattern 3 shoots.

After the shooting effect, as shown in FIG. 191 (E2), an image display as if the “pseudo-relational pattern 3” exploded and was destroyed is displayed. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" has won the shooting effect, and as shown in FIG. 191 (F2), the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" that has been sunk moves to the outside of the screen, and the shooting effect is produced. The winning "pseudo-relational pattern 2" is moved and displayed at the position of the middle symbol, and each effect symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen is moved and displayed at the original position (no promotion). After that, the process shifts to the third pseudo period.

[Third pseudo period]
Among the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns (pattern 70 or 72) corresponding to the pseudo B23, both the pattern 70 and the pattern 72, the pseudo continuous symbol finally displayed in the second pseudo period is “pseudo continuous symbol 2”. Since the pseudo continuous symbol finally displayed in the third pseudo period is “pseudo continuous symbol 3”, the flow of FIGS. 191(A) to (D) described above is executed, and after the shooting performance As shown in FIG. 191(E1), an image display as if the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" exploded and was destroyed is displayed. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" has won the shooting effect, and as shown in FIG. 191 (F1), the destroyed "pseudo-relational pattern 2" moves to the outside of the screen, and the shooting effect is produced. The "pseudo-relational symbol 3" that has won is moved to the position of the middle symbol and displayed, and each effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position (promotion). After that, the process shifts to the third pseudo period.

[4th pseudo period]
As for the pseudo B23 described in the present embodiment, since the fourth pseudo period becomes the main variation as described above, after the re-variation in the third pseudo period is executed, the left, right, and middle three effect symbols are produced. After the pseudo production is not included in the inside and the reach production is executed, the special figure 1 synchronization production end command or the special figure 2 synchronization production end command is transmitted, and the winning result is derived and displayed according to the determined variation pattern. . The above is an example of a series of pseudo continuous effect patterns.

Further, the pseudo-relational pattern promotion, as described above, is promoted from "pseudo-relational pattern 1" to "pseudo-relational pattern 2", or is promoted from "pseudo-relational pattern 2" to "pseudo-relational pattern 3". Does not have to be promoted to a pseudo-relational pattern that is one step higher. More specifically, as shown in FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 192(A), a start opening winning command is transmitted in response to a game ball hit by a player winning the starting opening, and then a variation pattern for performing pseudo continuous effect is selected. When the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern corresponding to the variation pattern are determined, the variation display of the three effect symbols of the left, right, and inside displayed on the screen is transmitted by the symbol synchronization effect start command. To be done.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 192(B) to (C), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally, as the middle symbol, "pseudo continuous symbol 1" simulating a fighter is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 192(D), when promotion of promotion is executed, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 displayed as the middle symbol is moved to the right side of the screen and displayed, and the "pseudo continuous symbol 3" simulating a warship is displayed. , Display on the left side of the screen. Then, the pseudo-relational pattern 1 shoots a machine gun, the pseudo-repetitive pattern 2 shoots a main gun, and a shooting effect is executed.

After the shooting effect, when the pattern to be promoted is selected from the pseudo-relational pattern display patterns, as shown in FIG. 192(E1), the image display as if the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" was destroyed and destroyed I do. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" has won the shooting effect, and as shown in FIG. 192 (F1), the destroyed "pseudo-relational pattern 1" moves to the outside of the screen, and the shooting effect is produced. The “pseudo-relational symbol 3” that has won is moved to the middle symbol position and displayed, and the effect symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position (promotion).
In addition, when a pattern that is not promoted is selected from the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern, as shown in FIG. 192 (E2), an image display is displayed in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" has been destroyed and destroyed. .. By doing this, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" has won the shooting effect, and as shown in FIG. 192 (F2), the destroyed "pseudo-relational pattern 3" moves to the outside of the screen, and the shooting effect is produced. The "pseudo-relational symbol 3" that has won is moved to the position of the middle symbol and displayed, and the effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position and displayed (no promotion).

According to the example of the effect explained above, the pseudo-relational patterns with different expectations for jackpots are not merely displayed to suggest the expectation to the player, but even after being displayed, the pseudo-relational patterns with higher expectations are displayed. It is possible to make the player feel happy and disappointed depending on whether the pseudo-relational pattern is promoted or not, so conventionally, the expectation level is suggested only by the number of repetitions of the pseudo variable display game. It is possible to pay attention to the contents of the effect that is performed in the pseudo continuous effect, as compared with the case of the effect, which can greatly improve the interest in the game.

In the pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment, based on the selection of the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern, the promotion symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol for the effect symbol displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Although it has been explained that the promotion is executed, the invention is not limited to this, but on the contrary, the demotion-inducing effect that is displayed and the displayed pseudo-relational pattern are demoted to the pseudo-relational pattern with a lower degree of expectation and displayed. The pseudo-relational symbol may be demoted to a pseudo-relational symbol that is demoted to a pseudo-relational symbol with a low expectation.

As an example, the variable display of the three effect symbols of the left, right, and middle displayed on the screen when the symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted is started, and after the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, respectively. Finally, as the middle symbol, "pseudo-relational symbol 2" imitating a tank is displayed. Next, the pseudo continuous symbol 2 displayed as the middle symbol is moved and displayed on the right side of the screen, and the "pseudo continuous symbol 1" simulating a fighter is displayed on the left side of the screen. Then, the pseudo-relational pattern 1 shoots a machine gun, the pseudo-relational pattern 2 shoots a main gun, and a shooting effect (demotion driven effect) is executed.
If a pattern (not shown) in which the pseudo-relationship is demoted is selected,
The image is displayed as if the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" exploded and was destroyed. By doing so, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" has won the shooting production, the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" that has been destroyed has moved to the outside of the screen, and the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" that has won the shooting production is , The display is moved to the position of the middle symbol, and the effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position and displayed (relegated).
On the contrary, when the pattern in which the pseudo-relational pattern is not demoted is selected, the image display as if the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is destroyed and destroyed is displayed. By doing this, it is shown that the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" has won the shooting production, the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" that has been destroyed has moved to the outside of the screen, and the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" that has won the shooting production is , The display is moved to the position of the middle symbol, and the effect symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen is moved to the original position and displayed (without demotion).

As a result, after the pseudo-relational patterns with different expectations for the jackpot are displayed, the pseudo-relational patterns with lower expectations than the pseudo-relational patterns displayed from there may be displayed (relegated). The player can be excited, and the player can be depressed by whether the pseudo-relational pattern is demoted or maintained as it is, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the pseudo continuous effect described in the present embodiment is not limited to the one that is executed by superimposing various pseudo continuous symbols on, for example, the middle symbol, and an existing effect symbol in which a number such as "7" is written (hereinafter , Also referred to as a numerical pattern). As an example, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a predetermined numerical pattern, and then the right symbol and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, except for the numerical symbol displayed as the left symbol (example: left symbol "5 It is also possible to execute the pseudo continuous effect triggered by the middle symbol "6" and the right symbol "6"). Further, the degree of expectation for the jackpot may be changed depending on the value of the middle symbol and the numerical symbol displayed on the right symbol. (For example, "1" "2" "2" expectation (low), "5" "7" "7" expectation (high)) As a result, a special pseudo-relational pattern such as the pseudo-relational pattern 1 becomes a numerical design. Even if they are not displayed in a superimposed manner, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the fact that the pseudo continuous symbols are not derived and displayed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed. It should be noted that the combination of the numerical symbols described here is only an example of numerous examples, so the right symbol and the middle symbol do not have to be the same numerical symbol, and various combinations of numerical symbols can be used. Depending on the combination of numbers, the degree of expectation for the jackpot may be changed, or even if the combination of numbers is different, the degree of expectation for the jackpot may be the same, and various patterns can be executed.

[Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Next, execution timings of promotion of promotion and pseudo continuous symbol promotion in a series of pseudo continuous productions of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the control timing of a series of pseudo continuous effects in this embodiment. In addition, here, as an example, a variation of the effect symbol is executed until the fourth pseudo period.

FIG. 193(A) is a timing chart corresponding to a case where a pseudo-relational pattern display pattern is selected from the first pseudo-relational pattern display pattern table in which promotion of promotion and pseudo-relational pattern promotion are not executed.

In FIG. 193(A), first, at a time t10, the game ball starts winning, and the starting opening winning command is transmitted to start the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310. At this time, the main control board 1310 transmits a symbol synchronization effect start command and the like to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation of the effect symbol, at time t11, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped. After that, at time t14, re-variation of the effect design is started. The period from time t10 to time t14 is a series of flow of the above-mentioned first pseudo period. After that, also in the second pseudo period and the third pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped, and the reach is reached at the time t15 when the fourth pseudo period (main fluctuation) is started. The performance is executed. Then, after the reach effect is finished, a variation state designation command is transmitted, the variation of the effect symbol is terminated in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310, and the definite symbol is displayed (time t18). ..

FIG. 193(B) is a time chart corresponding to the case where the pseudo continuous effect pattern is selected from the second pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table in which the pseudo continuous symbol promotion is executed without the promotion of promotion being executed.

In FIG. 193(B), first, at time t10, the game ball starts winning, and the starting opening winning command is transmitted to start the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310. At this time, the main control board 1310 transmits a symbol synchronization effect start command and the like to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation of the effect symbol, at time t11, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped. After that, at time t12 before the re-changing of the effect symbol is started, it is promoted to a pseudo continuous symbol having a higher expectation for the big hit than the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous symbol. After that, at time t14, re-variation of the effect design is started. The period from time t10 to time t14 is a series of flow of the above-mentioned first pseudo period. After that, also in the second pseudo period and the third pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous symbol is promoted. After the fourth pseudo period, at time t15, The reach production is executed. Then, after the reach effect is finished, a variation state designation command is transmitted, the variation of the effect symbol is terminated in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310, and the definite symbol is displayed (time t18). ..

FIG. 193(C) shows a case where a pseudo continuous production pattern is selected from the third pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table in which promotion is performed for the pseudo continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbol is promoted. It is a corresponding time chart.

In FIG. 193(C), first, at a time t10, the game ball starts winning, and the start opening winning command is transmitted to start the variable display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310. At this time, the main control board 1310 transmits a symbol synchronization effect start command and the like to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation of the effect symbol, at time t11, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped. After that, at time t12 before the re-change of the effect symbol is started, the promotion fan effect is executed. Next, at time t13, if the selected pseudo continuous effect pattern is to execute the pseudo-relational pattern promotion, it is promoted to a pseudo-relational pattern having a higher expectation for the jackpot than the temporarily stopped pseudo-relational pattern. After that, at time t14, re-variation of the effect design is started. The period from time t10 to time t14 is a series of flow of the above-mentioned first pseudo period. After that, also in the second pseudo period and the third pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol corresponding to the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is temporarily stopped, promotion is carried out, and pseudo continuous symbol promotion is performed, and the fourth pseudo period (actual fluctuation). ) Is started at time t15, the reach effect is executed. Then, after the reach effect is finished, a variation state designation command is transmitted, the variation of the effect symbol is terminated in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 1310, and the definite symbol is displayed (time t18). ..

[Other examples of pseudo continuous production]
Next, another example of the above-described pseudo continuous effect will be described.
First, in the pseudo continuous effect pattern table shown in FIG. 181, the fourth pseudo continuous symbol display pattern that is randomly selected according to the selected pseudo continuous effect pattern will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194.
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a fourth pseudo continuous effect pattern table selected when promotion of promotion and pseudo-relational pattern promotion is not executed.

The conditions for selecting the fourth pseudo continuous effect pattern table are the same as the case of the first pseudo continuous effect pattern table, but the difference from the first pseudo continuous effect pattern table is that the pseudo continuous symbols 1 to 3 described above are Before being displayed, the effect that the pseudo continuous symbol 0 is displayed is performed.

Incidentally, "pseudo 0" shown in the fourth pseudo continuous symbol display pattern table corresponds to pseudo continuous symbol 0 (described later), "pseudo 1" corresponds to pseudo continuous symbol 1, and "pseudo 2" is pseudo continuous symbol 2 Corresponding to, "pseudo 3" corresponds to the pseudo continuous pattern 3.

Like the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3, the pseudo-relational pattern 0 in this embodiment is a pattern that is displayed by being superposed on the middle symbol when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect, but an expectation for a big hit. It does not indicate the degree. In other words, in a series of pseudo continuous production, unlike the configuration in which the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of pseudo consecutive symbol displayed immediately before the re-change of the effect symbol, the player does not have the degree of expectation for the jackpot, but to the player It is a pseudo continuous pattern that can show that a pseudo continuous effect is performed.

Pseudo-relational pattern 0 can be switched to pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 which are displayed based on the pattern set in the fourth pseudo-continuous production pattern table in the variation of each production symbol in the series of pseudo-continuous production. It is a design. After the pseudo-relational pattern 0 is displayed, one of the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 is always displayed after that, so that the pseudo-continuous production is performed before the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 are temporarily stopped. The execution is shown to the player, which also has the effect of making the player feel at ease. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation for the jackpot is unknown only with the pseudo-relational pattern 0, it is not known which of the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 will be switched (changed) until just before the effect design is temporarily stopped. It is possible to excite from the beginning to the end in the variation of the production design, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
The timing of switching from the pseudo-relational pattern 0 to the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 may be immediately after the pseudo-relational pattern 0 is displayed or immediately before the effect design is temporarily stopped, and various modes can be adopted. . Further, as the switching from the pseudo continuous symbol 0 to the pseudo continuous symbols 1 to 3, at the timing of switching, it may be instantaneously switched or may be gradually changed.

Next, an example of the pseudo continuous effect when the pseudo continuous symbol 0 is displayed will be described below with reference to FIG. 195.
If, for example, the fluctuation pattern 17 is selected from among the fluctuation patterns, the number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol is once (the second pseudo period is the main fluctuation), and the promotion curse effect is not executed. Therefore, the pseudo continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 181 is selected from either pseudo B1 or pseudo B4.
When the pseudo B1 is selected, since the promotion and the promotion of the pseudo-relational pattern are patterns that are not executed, the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern is displayed from the first pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table or the fourth pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table. When the pseudo B4 is selected, since the promotion effect is not executed and the pseudo-relational pattern promotion is executed, the pseudo-relational symbol display pattern is selected from the second pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table. To be done. Here, it is assumed that the pseudo B1 is selected and the pseudo continuous effect of the fourth pseudo continuous symbol display pattern is executed.

The number of temporary stop and re-variation of the effect image of the pseudo B1 is 1 time (the second pseudo period becomes the main variation), and the pattern that neither promotion nor effect production or pseudo-relational pattern promotion is executed, so the fourth pseudo-relational pattern It is selected from any of the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns 104 to 106 in the display pattern table.

For example, when the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern 104 is selected, the pseudo continuous symbol 0 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo period. Since "pseudo 0→1" is displayed in the column of the first pseudo period, it is displayed by switching from the pseudo continuous symbol 0 to the pseudo continuous symbol 1, so the transition to the second pseudo period (re-change) Before the), the effect of switching from the displayed pseudo-relational pattern 0 to the pseudo-relational pattern 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a switching effect) is executed. Then, the next second pseudo period starts.

As a specific flow of the effect, when the game ball hit by the player wins in the starting opening, the main control board 1310 transmits a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect. Then, the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect is selected based on that, and when the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern corresponding to the change pattern are determined, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command or the special figure 2 tuning effect The start command is transmitted, and the variable display of the three effect symbols of left, right, and center displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 195(A) is started. Immediately thereafter, the special symbol 1 designation command or the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 195(B), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, respectively, and then shown in FIG. 195(C). Thus, as the middle pattern, "pseudo continuous pattern 0" with the "?" mark drawn is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 195(D) to (F), as a correspondence for switching from "pseudo continuous symbol 0" to "pseudo continuous symbol 1", "pseudo continuous symbol 0" rotates about the vertical direction. Such a display is performed, and thereafter, "pseudo-relational pattern 1" imitating a fighter is displayed. When the "pseudo continuous symbol 1" is displayed, the temporary stop of the first pseudo period is established, and as shown in FIG. 195(G), the second pseudo period becomes the main fluctuation.

As described above, as the medium pattern, the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 suggesting the expectation for the jackpot are not merely displayed, but the expectation level is set before any one of the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 is displayed. By displaying the pseudo continuous symbol 0 that does not have, it is shown to the player that the pseudo continuous effect is being executed, and while giving a sense of security, after that, the pseudo continuous symbol 0 from the pseudo continuous symbol 1 having the degree of expectation Among 3 to 3, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by being able to produce a feeling of excitement in terms of which pseudo-relational pattern is switched to.

[Other embodiment of pseudo continuous symbol 0]
The above-mentioned "pseudo-relational pattern 0" does not have the degree of expectation by itself, and further, it is explained that it is completely unknown which pseudo-relational pattern with which degree of expectation it switches to, but suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. It may be one that does.

For example, if the pattern that switches from "pseudo-relational pattern 0" to "pseudo-relational pattern 2" is selected, for example, if the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern 105 is selected, the pseudo-relational pattern in the first pseudo period. 0 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Since “pseudo 0→2” is displayed in the column of the first pseudo period, the pseudo continuous symbol 0 is switched to the pseudo continuous symbol 2 for display, and thus the second pseudo period is started (re-variation). Before the), the effect of switching from the displayed pseudo continuous symbol 0 to the pseudo continuous symbol 2 is executed. Then, the next second pseudo period starts.

As a concrete flow of the effect, when the game ball hit by the player wins the starting opening, the main control board 1310 transmits a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect. Then, the variation pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect is selected based on that, and when the pseudo continuous effect pattern and the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern corresponding to the change pattern are determined, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect The start command is transmitted, and the variable display of the three effect symbols of left, right, and center displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started as shown in FIG. 196(A). Immediately after that, the special symbol 1 designation command or the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 196(B), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed, respectively, and then, as shown in FIG. 196(C), as "middle symbols", "pseudo continuous symbol 1" and "pseudo continuous symbol 2". "Pseudo-relational pattern 0" in which "" is combined as one pseudo-relational pattern is displayed.
In addition, "pseudo continuous symbol 0" in the present embodiment is a combination of a plurality of pseudo continuous symbols including a pseudo continuous symbol selected from the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 195(D) to (E), as a correspondence for switching from “pseudo continuous pattern 0” to “pseudo continuous pattern 2”, “pseudo continuous pattern 1” drawn on “pseudo continuous pattern 0” And "pseudo continuous pattern 2" are pressed against each other. Next, as shown in FIG. 196(F), the “pseudo-relational pattern 2” that has won the pressing effect is switched from the “pseudo-relational pattern 0” and displayed. At the time when the "pseudo continuous symbol 2" is displayed, the temporary stop of the first pseudo period is established, and as shown in FIG. 196(G), a transition to the second pseudo period becomes the main fluctuation.

As described above, a combination of a plurality of pseudo continuous symbols (in the above, the pseudo continuous symbol 1 and the pseudo continuous symbol 2) set by the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern and including the pseudo continuous symbol to be temporarily stopped is a “pseudo continuous symbol”. By displaying as “0”, it can be suggested that one of the plurality of pseudo-relational patterns having the degree of expectation drawn on the pseudo-relational pattern 0 is temporarily stopped, and the player can be depressed by the result of the push-and-play effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a pattern relating to the display mode of the pseudo continuous symbol 0 when the push effect is executed after the first pseudo period will be described below. The following patterns correspond to the pseudo continuous symbol display patterns of the fourth pseudo continuous effect pattern table.

[Pattern 118]
For example, an effect in which the “pseudo continuous symbol 1” and the “pseudo continuous symbol 2” drawn on the “pseudo continuous symbol 0” are pressed against each other in the first pseudo period is executed. When the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that is switched to "pseudo-relational pattern 1", "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is displayed by switching from "pseudo-relational pattern 0" by winning the push effect.
Next, in the second pseudo period, a pseudo-relational pattern 0 is displayed in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" that has won the push-and-play effect is displayed in the left half and the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" is displayed in the right half. The production of pushing each other is executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 2", "pseudo-relational pattern 2" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".
Next, in the third pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern 0 in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" that has won the pressing effect is displayed on the left half and the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" is displayed on the right half is displayed, and the effects of pressing each other are displayed. Executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 3", "pseudo-relational pattern 3" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".

In the pattern 118, when the push effect is executed, the one who wins the push effect performed immediately before is displayed on the left half of the pseudo continuous symbol 0 displayed next.

[Pattern 119]
For example, an effect in which the “pseudo continuous symbol 1” and the “pseudo continuous symbol 2” drawn on the “pseudo continuous symbol 0” are pressed against each other in the first pseudo period is executed. When the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that is switched to "pseudo-relational pattern 1", "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is displayed by switching from "pseudo-relational pattern 0" by winning the push effect.
Next, in the second pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern 0 in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" that has won the pressing effect is displayed on the left half and the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" is displayed on the right half is displayed, and the effects of pressing each other are displayed. Executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 3", "pseudo-relational pattern 3" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".
Next, in the third pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern 0 is displayed in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" that has won the pressing effect is displayed in the left half and the "pseudo-relational pattern 1" is displayed in the right half, and the effects of pressing each other are displayed. Executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 3", "pseudo-relational pattern 3" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".

In the pattern 119, it is possible to promote from the pseudo-relational pattern 1 to the pseudo-relational pattern 3 at a stretch, or to produce the possibility that the pseudo-relational pattern 1 may be demoted to the pseudo-relational pattern 1 at a stretch, thereby keeping an eye on the production from start to finish. Since the game is created, it is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to reduce the interest in the game.

Further, not limited to the pseudo continuous symbol display pattern shown in the fourth pseudo continuous effect pattern table, effects described below may be executed. In the first pseudo period, an effect in which the "pseudo continuous symbol 1" and the "pseudo continuous symbol 2" drawn on the "pseudo continuous symbol 0" are pressed against each other is executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 2", "pseudo-relational pattern 2" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".
Next, in the second pseudo period, the pseudo-relational pattern 0 in which the "pseudo-relational pattern 2" that has won the push-motion effect is displayed on the left half and the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" is displayed on the right half is displayed, and the effects of pressing each other are displayed. Executed. If the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 3", "pseudo-relational pattern 3" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".
Next, in the third pseudo period, the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" (not shown) indicating that the "pseudo-relational pattern 3" that has won the push-and-play effect is the left half and the big hit is displayed on the right half. 0 is displayed, and the effects of pushing each other are executed. When the pseudo-relational pattern display pattern selected at that time is a pattern that switches to "pseudo-relational pattern 4", "pseudo-relational pattern 4" wins the push-and-play effect and is switched and displayed from "pseudo-relational pattern 0".

In this pattern, in the first pseudo period and the second pseudo period, the person who has a higher expectation to see other jackpots wins the push production, and the variation of the production pattern reaches the third pseudo period, so the jackpot game A "pseudo-relational pattern 4" (big hit confirmed pattern) in which a predetermined pattern indicating that it is confirmed to be performed is drawn appears. As a result, it is possible to further increase expectations for the pseudo continuous effect and improve the interest in the game.

Moreover, when performing the above-mentioned push-effect, you may make it the effect which operates the operation button 410. Simultaneously with the start of the pressing effect, a predetermined image for instructing the operation button 410 to perform an operation (such as continuous hitting and long-pressing) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation by the player is looked up. By visually recognizing it by the player, by operating it, it can be reminded that one with a higher expectation for the jackpot may win the push-and-play performance, and it is possible to actively participate in the game, The interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is operated, various pseudo continuous symbols are displayed based on the selected pseudo continuous symbol display pattern.

The display mode of "pseudo continuous symbol 0" is not limited to the above-described one, and various modes can be selected.
When displaying "pseudo continuous pattern 0" with "?" mark drawn, if the "?" mark is small, the probability of switching to "pseudo continuous pattern 1" is high, and if it is large, "pseudo continuous pattern 3" is displayed. It is also possible to suggest which one of the pseudo continuous patterns 1 to 3 is to be switched depending on the display mode such as the color and size of the "?" mark, which is highly likely to be switched to.

Further, the fourth pseudo-relational symbol display pattern table in the present embodiment, in all of the respective production symbol variation in the series of pseudo-continuous production, in any of the pseudo-relational patterns 1 to 3 having the degree of expectation from the pseudo-relational symbol 0. Although the example in which the effect to be switched is performed is not limited to this, for example, when a variation pattern in which re-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice is selected, even if the effect to be switched is performed only once among them is selected. The number of executions of the switching effect in the series of pseudo continuous effects can be appropriately selected.

In addition, in a series of pseudo-continuous effects, when the effect symbol is finally changed again, the effect symbol may change (effect symbol effect immediately before the main variation), and the switching effect may be performed. If it explains in full detail, when the pattern in which the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice is selected, "pseudo continuous symbol 0" is first displayed in the first pseudo period. In the above-mentioned example, the switching effect is executed before shifting to the second pseudo period, but in the present embodiment, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped without being switched from "pseudo continuous symbol 0", and the re-variation is executed, and Transition to 2 pseudo periods. In the second pseudo period, the switching effect is executed after the "pseudo continuous symbol 0" is displayed and before the effect symbol shifts to the third pseudo period (actual change). Thereby, in the series of pseudo continuous production, from the "pseudo continuous symbol 0" to the pseudo continuous symbols 1 to 3 having the expectation level, until the timing of the variation of the final effect symbol to be re-varied. Since it is unclear which pseudo-relational pattern is switched to, it is possible to keep the feeling of excitement for a long time and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Another embodiment of the starting port unit]
By the way, in the case where the starting opening unit 2100 as described above is provided, for example, in a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a probability fluctuation state, a special lottery is performed by receiving game balls into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. If a game ball is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 during the period from the start to the time when the drawn special lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. The start of the special lottery result suggestion is suspended until the completion of the suggestion of the special lottery result that has been drawn to. However, with this reserved memory accumulated to the maximum (for example, 4), the game ball is further started at the first starting opening. Even if the player wins in 2002, since the overflow is not stored, the player temporarily stops the firing of the game ball, so-called hitting, so as to minimize the useless firing and the invalid starting winning. Therefore, as a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 may decrease due to a decrease in the number of launched balls. In order to suppress this, the distribution winning opening unit 2150 having a structure that prevents overflow at a fast pace and effectively prevents stop hitting of the game ball will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 197 to 198. I will describe.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197, the distribution winning opening unit 2150 is provided in the game board 5, and the distribution winning opening unit 2150 is received in the lower portion inside the distribution winning opening unit 2150. A plurality of detecting means (such as a photo sensor) capable of detecting a game ball are provided. The plurality of detecting means are provided inside the first starting opening 2002 on the left side in front view and on the inside of the second starting opening 2004 on the right side in front view in the lower portion inside the distribution winning opening unit 2150. The first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 can be won even in a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a probability variation state, for example. In the case of a big hit, the profit given to the player is higher than in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation triggered by entering the first starting opening 2002.
In this example, a distribution device 2160 that distributes game balls alternately to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 in the distribution winning opening unit 2150 vertically above the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. Is provided. The distribution device 2160 has a distribution inlet 2151 vertically upward that allows a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 to enter. The distribution receiving port 2151 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball guided to the distribution receiving port 2151 always drops toward the distribution device 2160. ing.

The distribution device 2160 is composed of a bottom plate 2160a and a distribution plate 2160b that stands upright at a right angle from the longitudinal center of the bottom plate 2160a, and has an inverted T-shaped member. It is constructed symmetrically. The distribution device 2160 is swingably attached to the distribution winning opening unit 2150 at a swing fulcrum 2160c where the bottom plate 2160a and the distribution plate 2160b intersect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198(a), the bottom plate 2160a is usually stationary with the lower right end of the bottom plate 2160a being in contact with the stopper 2153, or is swung counterclockwise from the illustrated state. The bottom end of the bottom plate 2160a comes to rest while being in contact with the stopper 2152. In such a stationary state, the right receiving portion 2160e of the distribution device 2160, which is partitioned and formed in the clockwise direction with respect to the distribution plate 2160b, or the distribution plate 2160b, is defined and formed in the counterclockwise direction in the figure. One of the left receiving portions 2160d of the sorting device 2160 facing the sorting device 2160 faces the sorting port 2151.

According to the distribution device 2160 having the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 198(a), the game ball is distributed to the left receiving portion 2160d facing the distribution inlet 2151 and stationary. When entering 2151, the game ball falls into the left receiving portion 2160d, and the weight of the game ball causes the sorting device 2160 to swing counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 198(b). As a result, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning opening unit 2150 from the distribution receiving opening 2151 drops inside the distribution winning opening unit 2150 toward the first starting opening 2002, and the distribution device 2160 is counterclockwise. The bottom plate 2160a oscillates in the rotating direction and stands still with the lower left end of the bottom plate 2160a in contact with the stopper 2152.

Then, when the next game ball enters the distribution port 2151 while the right receiving part 2160e faces the distribution port 2151 and is stationary, this time the game ball falls into the right receiving part 2160e, The distribution device 2160 swings in the clockwise direction due to the weight of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning opening unit 2150 from the distribution receiving opening 2151 drops inside the distribution winning opening unit 2150 toward the second starting opening 2004, and the distribution device 2160 again. , Will stand still in the illustrated state. In this way, the game balls that have entered the distribution winning opening unit 2150 are alternately distributed to the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 by the distribution device 2160.

With the above configuration, conventionally, the maximum number of reserved memories was four during the normal game, but in the present embodiment, the game balls enter the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 alternately. , The first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored alternately, the maximum number of pending storage is 8 (an example of the number), so the risk of overflow is greatly reduced, so stop shot effect Can be effectively suppressed.

Further, in the present example, the game balls are distributed alternately by dropping the game balls to the swingable distribution device 2160, but this is merely an example, and the structure is such that the game balls are distributed. If so, various modes can be selected. For example, in the above-described configuration, the distribution device 2160 is operated by the weight of the game ball, but a predetermined mode (every predetermined time elapses) after the power is turned on by using an electric drive such as a motor or a solenoid. The distribution device 2160 may be operated by (for example, an operation of switching the distribution direction).

Next, at the time of reservation fulfillment executed when the number of reserved memories of special symbols relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 provided in the distribution winning opening unit 2150 is fulfilled. The effect will be described below.

Even in the normal game state as in this embodiment, the variation of the special symbol can be held eight times (also referred to as eight pieces held), and even if the risk of overflow is low, the eight pieces held memory is accumulated. At this point, it is not possible to store more memory, so the player temporarily stops the game ball's firing, so-called hitting, to prevent unnecessary firing and invalid starting prizes as much as possible. Occasionally, the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease.
Furthermore, if the player stops hitting a game ball, the number of held memories generally decreases faster than when the held memories are filled again, so the number of held memories gradually decreases. There is a high possibility that In order to suppress this, in addition to enhancing the enjoyment of the game, even when the reserved memory is satisfied, an effect at the time of retaining satisfaction for continuing to hit the game ball is executed.

[Satisfaction production 1]
In the following, as an example of the effect when the hold is satisfied in the present embodiment, “effect 1 when the satisfaction is satisfied” will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a series of flows that suggests the degree of expectation related to the special symbol that is changing due to the effect when the hold is satisfied.
In addition, in the present embodiment, as the satisfaction effect 1, a satisfaction effect 1A, a satisfaction effect 1B, and a satisfaction effect 1C are provided, and FIGS. 199(1a) to (1b) show the satisfaction effect 1A and FIG. 199. (2a) to (2b) are effects 1B when satisfied, and (3a) to (3b) are effects 1C when satisfied.

In the "satisfaction effect 1", which is an example of the retention satisfaction effect in the present embodiment, the special symbols that are changing at the satisfied stage are triggered by the fact that the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. The effect that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the jackpot is executed. Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 acquires a random number for satisfaction production when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and when the acquired random number is satisfied. It is determined whether the random number for effect matches with the winning value classified into each of a plurality of types of on-hold satisfaction effects defined in the on-hold satisfaction immediate effect pattern table described later, and the result of the determination is "sufficiency effect 1A. One of the satisfaction effects 1 is executed based on the fact that the winning value of 1B, 1C” is met. As the effect 1 at the time of satisfaction, as shown in FIG. 199 (1a) to (1b), when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the ladybug at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600. A mini-character image that imitates appears, and at the same time, a message "Hold full tank!
Then, the variation of the effect design is stopped in accordance with the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

In this way, triggered by the fact that the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, by executing the suggestion of the degree of expectation regarding the special symbol that is currently fluctuating, the first special symbol and the second symbol It is possible to feel that the expectation for the jackpot will increase when the number of reserved memories of the special symbols is satisfied, and it is possible to continue to shoot the game ball to put it in the reserved state of eight again. As a result, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and at the same time enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in the figure, it is preferable to prepare a wide variety of patterns as the effect 1 at the time of satisfaction, for example, the effect contents are changed depending on whether the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit or a miss, Therefore, the player may be expected to have some degree of expectation about the winning. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the content of the displayed message is different in the three types of fulfillment effect 1, and in the fulfillment effect 1A, the fact that the reserved memory is satisfied and the expectation for the jackpot are high. A message (high expectation production) that indicates that it is high is displayed (high expectation production), and in the fulfillment production 1B, the fact that the hold memory has been fulfilled and the expectation for the jackpot is the retention fulfillment production 1A. The message "Low hold full! Chance!" (low-expectation effect), which suggests that it is lower than that, is displayed, and in satisfaction effect 1C, only the hold memory is satisfied, regardless of the degree of expectation for the jackpot. A message (an uncertain expectation effect) is displayed to indicate that “Holding is full! Thank you for your hard work!”.

Further, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the present embodiment, the profit to be given to the player when the big hit is made different. Specifically, compared to a case where the variation of the first special symbol triggered by entering the first starting opening 2002 is a big hit, the second is triggered by entering the second starting opening 2004 (2) When the variation of the special symbol is a big hit, the profit that the player can obtain is larger, and the contents of the profit include the number of times of repeating the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 (at the time of "big hit" ( The number of rounds) may be more when the second special symbol is a big hit, or the probability changes after the big hit.

Further, by adopting the pachinko machine 1 including the distribution winning opening unit 2150 as in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the profits given to the player when the jackpot is different depending on the type of the special symbol are different, Although it is possible to give the player the opportunity to win the jackpot lottery, it is ideal for the player that the profit attached when the jackpot is high is ideal, so it is not the fluctuation of the first special symbol, (2) It is more profitable for the player to win a jackpot due to the fluctuation of the special symbol, so that the interest of the game when the player wins the game is greatly improved.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a production different from the “satisfaction production 1” that suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol that fluctuates when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. As an example, the type of special symbol that fluctuates when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is given to the player. The suggested "satisfaction effect 2" can be executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the satisfaction effect 2, a satisfaction effect 2A, a satisfaction effect 2B, a satisfaction effect 2C, and a satisfaction effect 2D are provided. Specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires a random number for satisfaction when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the acquired random number for satisfaction at the time of acquisition is, It is determined which of the winning values divided into each of the plurality of types of holding-satisfaction effects defined in the holding-satisfaction effect pattern table, which will be described later, matches, and the result of the determination is "the satisfaction-time effects 2A, 2B, and 2C. One of the satisfying effects 2 is executed based on the fact that it matches the winning value. The contents of the satisfaction effect 2 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS.

In the present embodiment, FIGS. 200(1a) to (1b) show a flow in which the effect 2A at the time of satisfaction indicating that the first special symbol is changing is executed, and FIGS. 200(2a) to (2b). [Fig. 6] is a diagram showing a flow of execution of a satisfactory time effect 2B for notifying that the first special symbol is changing. 200 (3a) ~ (3b) shows a flow in which the effect 2C at the time of satisfaction, which suggests that the second special symbol is changing, is executed, and Figs. 200 (4a) to (4b) show the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the flow by which the production|generation 2D at the time of satisfaction which notifies that a design is changing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 200 (1a) to (1b), when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the production 2A at the time of satisfaction fills a ladybird in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600. The imitated mini-character image appears, and at the same time, a midway message "First special symbol change..." is displayed in advance, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 1 second has elapsed), "First special symbol change..." Maybe?” is displayed, suggesting that the changing special symbol may be the first special symbol (may be the second special symbol). Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 200 (2a) to (2b), when the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the production 2B at the time of satisfaction fills a ladybird in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600. The imitated mini-character image appears, and at the same time, a midway message "First special symbol change..." is displayed in advance, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 1 second has elapsed), "First special symbol change..." All the message "confirmation!" is displayed, suggesting the confirmation that the fluctuating special symbol is the first special symbol (it may not be the second special symbol). Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 200 (3a) to (3b), when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the production 2C at the time of satisfaction satisfies the ladybird in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600. The imitated mini-character image appears, and at the same time, a halfway message "second special symbol change..." is displayed in advance, and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 1 second has elapsed), "second special symbol change...". Maybe?” is displayed, suggesting that the changing special symbol may be the second special symbol (may be the first special symbol). Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 200 (4a) to (4b), when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the production 2D when satisfied satisfies the ladybird in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600. The imitated mini-character image appears, and at the same time, a halfway message "second special symbol change..." is displayed in advance, and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 1 second has elapsed), "second special symbol change...". All the message "confirmation!" is displayed, suggesting the confirmation that the fluctuating special symbol is the second special symbol (it may not be the first special symbol). Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

In addition, as the fulfillment effect 2 to be executed, the first special symbol is executed during the change because the lottery result of the changing special symbol and the content of the displayed message image do not contradict each other. In the case, "satisfaction effect 2A" that suggests that it may be the first special symbol, "satisfaction effect 2B" that informs that it is the first special symbol, and it may be the second special symbol. The "satisfaction effect 2C", which indicates that there is, is mainly executed. In addition, if the second special symbol is executed during the change, it informs that there is a possibility that it may be the second special symbol, which suggests that it may be the first special symbol, “Satisfaction production 2B”. "Satisfaction effect 2C", "Satisfaction effect 2D" for notifying that it is the second special symbol is mainly executed.

As described above, in the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction in the present embodiment, whether the special symbol in change is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suggested or notified before the lottery result is derived. Since it is designed so that the player can know the profit that can be obtained in the case of a big hit before the result of the big hit is actually derived, which kind of special symbol was used to win the big hit? You can entertain the game with peace of mind by eliminating uncertain distrust.
In addition, in the execution of only the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction, the special symbol that is fluctuating is a first special symbol or a second special symbol. By performing at the same time as the effect related to, for example, when an effect with a high expectation for a big hit is being executed, as the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction, a notification that the changing special symbol is the second special symbol is satisfied. By executing the time effect 2D, the player can associate the two effects and recall that the second special symbol may be a big hit, so that the expectation for the effect is increased and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.
Furthermore, since the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction of the present embodiment is a step progression effect in which the halfway message is displayed and then all the messages are displayed, the player feels nervous while the halfway message changes to all the messages. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and the like, and it is possible to further improve the interest when the production having a high expectation for the jackpot is being executed as described above.

In addition, when executing the satisfaction effect 2, an effect of operating the operation button 410 may be performed. At the same time as displaying the halfway message, a predetermined image for instructing the operation button 410 to perform an operation within the time limit is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the player is informed of the operation and the operation button. When 410 is operated, a predetermined image for instructing the operation button 410 to perform an operation within a time limit is hidden, and a change from a halfway message to an entire message causes a feeling of tension. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and the like, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the production having a high degree of expectation for the jackpot is being executed as described above.

In addition, when performing the effect of operating the operation button 410, it is necessary for the player to prepare the time required to operate the operation button 410, and in the effect related to the special symbol that is changing, the operation button 410 is used. Since the effect to be operated needs to be in a state in which it is not executed, whether or not to execute is determined according to the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation being executed at that time and the game state. Specifically, the peripheral control part 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 refers to information about the variation time, information about the variation pattern, and the like when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. , "How much remaining time is changing" and "which effect is being executed" are specified, and whether the specified situation is that the sufficient effect 2 for operating the operation button 410 can be executed or not. judge. Then, in the specified situation, when the time to operate the operation button 410 cannot be secured, or in the effect related to the changing special symbol, the operation to operate the operation button 410 is executed, the operation button The effect 2 at the time of satisfaction of operating 410 is not performed.

It should be noted that some players may not operate the operation button 410 within the time limit even when the satisfaction effect 2 for operating the operation button 410 is executed. In this case, when the time limit is reached, a predetermined image for instructing the operation button 410 to perform an operation within the time limit may be hidden, and then the halfway message may be changed to a full message. However, without changing to all the messages, it is possible to continue to be displayed in the state of the halfway message, and to notify the player of the type of the special symbol that is currently changing and not be suggested. In the present embodiment, as the time limit for recognizing the operation on the operation button 410, the timing when the changing time of the changing special symbol is the remaining time of 3 seconds (an example among many) is set.

In addition, the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction of the present embodiment is configured to limit the execution depending on the progress of the game. This is because the following problems may occur. For example, as described above, when performing a step progress effect of displaying a halfway message and then displaying all the messages, it takes a predetermined time from displaying the halfway message to displaying all the messages. There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol will be ended within a time and the variable display of the new special symbol will be started. In this case, the content of the message may be inconsistent, which may reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when the effect 2H is satisfied when a performance with a high expectation for the jackpot is being executed and a message indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is settled is displayed, the effect with a high expectation is set. Even though it was executed, it made the player notice that it was a fluctuation of the first special symbol with little profit, not only spoiling the fun of the production, but even if it was hit by the fluctuation, the player's There is a risk that satisfaction will be reduced.

In order to solve these problems, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the execution of the sufficient effect 2 is restricted according to the progress status of the game. .. Specifically, the peripheral control part 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 refers to information about the variation time, information about the variation pattern, and the like when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. , "How much is the remaining variation time" and "which production is being executed", and it is determined whether or not the specified situation is included in a predetermined limiting condition. When the specified situation is included in the predetermined limiting condition, the satisfaction time effect 2 is not performed even if the satisfaction time effect 2 is selected by the determination using the satisfaction time effect random number.

Among the limiting conditions of the present embodiment, "the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more (an example among many)" is set as the first limiting condition. In addition, as the second limiting condition, "the effect with high expectation for the jackpot is being executed" is set. As a restriction of the effect 2 at the time of satisfaction based on the first restriction condition, "all restrictions of the effects 2A to 2D at the time of satisfaction" are set, and, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol that is changing is 3 seconds or less. Alternatively, when the set fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less, the satisfaction-time effect 2 is not executed. In addition, as the restriction of the satisfaction effect 2 based on the second restriction condition, “only the satisfaction effect 2B is restricted” is set. The “effects with high expectation for a big hit” correspond to a plurality of predetermined effects (preliminary effect, pseudo-relational effect, reach effect, etc.) selected at the time of game design. As a method of advancing the game progress without performing the satisfaction effect 2, "discard the determination result using the satisfaction effect random number and execute another predetermined satisfaction effect", or Repeating the acquisition and determination of the random number for satisfaction time production until the random number for satisfaction time effect corresponding to the other effects other than the time effect 2B is acquired” and the like.

Here, the details of “discarding the determination result using the random number for satisfaction time effect and executing another predetermined satisfaction time effect” will be described. In the present embodiment, when the execution of the satisfaction effect 2 is limited, instead of the satisfaction effect 2, it does not suggest which special symbol is changing, and does not suggest the degree of expectation regarding winning or losing. "Time effect 3" is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the satisfaction effect 3, a satisfaction effect 3A, a satisfaction effect 3B, and a satisfaction effect 3C are provided. In addition, not only as a substitute for the satisfaction effect 2, but also when the satisfaction effects 1 and 2 are selected, the fulfillment effect 3 is satisfied with the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is also executed when this happens. Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the random number for satisfaction production when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the acquired satisfaction time is acquired. It is determined whether the random number for effect matches with the winning value classified into each of the plurality of types of on-hold satisfying effects defined in the on-hold satisfying effect pattern table, which will be described later, and the determination result is "at-enhancement effect 3A. 3B, 3C”, any one of the on-satisfaction effects 3 is executed. On the other hand, when executing the effect 3 for satisfaction instead of the effect 2 for satisfaction, the effect 3C for satisfaction is always executed. The contents of the effect 3 at the time of satisfaction will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a series of flows of a fortune telling effect which is an effect example of the effect 3 at the time of satisfaction that does not suggest which special symbol is changing and does not suggest the degree of expectation regarding winning or losing. ) To (1c) show a flow in which the fulfillment effect 3A in which “Daikichi” is selected as a result of fortune-telling is executed, and in FIGS. 201 (2a) to (2c), “Kichi” is selected as a result of fortune-telling. 201 (3a) to (3c) are diagrams showing a flow in which the fulfillment effect 3C in which "bad" is selected as a result of fortune-telling is executed. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 201 (1a) to (1b), the production 3A at the time of satisfaction satisfies the reserved memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the special symbols are changed, and the game board side. A mini character image simulating a ladybird and a message indicating that a fortune-telling effect will be displayed are displayed in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, and one of three types of "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Kyou" is selected. Perform the performance. The displayed "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Bad" are sequentially displayed brightly, and finally, as shown in FIG. 201(1c), after the player operates the operation button 410, the display is brightened. The fortune shown at the location is selected, and a message notifying that "Daikichi" has been selected is displayed. Finally, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, and the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 201 (2a) to (2b), when the special symbols are changing, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the game board side is satisfied. A mini character image simulating a ladybird and a message indicating that a fortune-telling effect will be displayed are displayed in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, and one of three types of "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Kyou" is selected. Perform the performance. The displayed "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Kyou" are displayed brighter in order, and after the player operates the operation button 410, they are finally displayed brighter as shown in FIG. 201(2c). The fortune shown in the place is selected, and a message notifying that "Kichi" has been selected is displayed. Finally, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, and the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As shown in (3a) to (3b) of FIG. 201, the effect 3C at the time of satisfaction, when the special symbols are changed, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the game board side A mini character image simulating a ladybird and a message indicating that a fortune-telling effect will be displayed are displayed in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, and one of three types of "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Kyou" is selected. Perform the performance. The displayed "Daikichi", "Kichi", and "Kyou" are sequentially displayed brightly, and finally, as shown in FIG. 201(3c), after the operation button 410 is operated by the player, they are finally displayed brightly. The fortune shown at the location is selected, and a message notifying that "bad" has been selected is displayed. Finally, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, and the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

In this way, the effect 3 at the time of satisfaction satisfies the effects 1 and 2 at the time of satisfaction because the effect 3 at the time of satisfaction does not suggest which special symbol is changing and does not indicate the degree of expectation regarding the winning or losing. Compared to, because it is difficult to be associated with the winnings related to the changing special symbols, the player will not be discouraged before the lottery result is derived, and thus the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the fortune-telling effect is executed as the satisfaction time effect 3 when the execution of the satisfaction time effect 2 is limited has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the satisfaction degree that does not suggest the degree of winning or losing is suggested. If it is a time effect, another effect may be executed.

Further, the limiting condition is not limited to the one described above, and various conditions may be set according to the game situation or the like to be limited.

It should be noted that the type of message is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and various messages can be displayed. For example, in the production 1 at the time of satisfaction, whether the game state or the first special symbol is changing, (2) The content of the message may be changed depending on whether the special symbol is changing.

In addition to changing the content of the message, the design of the mini-character image and the balloon of the message may be other than the one shown in the figure. For example, in addition to the image simulating a ladybird, a symbol such as a star or a circle that is not a so-called character You can use various modes such as using marks, displaying effect images such as concentrated lines around the mini-character image, increasing the power by making the pattern of the balloon jagged to increase the power, and displaying the held image different from usual. It shall be selectable.

In addition, the jackpot may be suggested based on the color of the message, the effect image, and the pattern of the balloon. For example, the higher the expectation for the jackpot, the more the effect image is displayed and the pattern of the balloon is jagged. In addition, the message color is usually "black" where it is displayed in "red", and by improving the decorativeness compared to when the expectation for a jackpot is low, it is not only decoration, Since the variation of the expectation suggestion about the jackpot to be given to the player is increased, it is possible to make the player happy and unhappy and to improve the interest in the game.

Regarding the effect on hold satisfaction in the present embodiment, it is described that it is executed according to the image mode displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, but in addition to that, the movable accessory is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbol. It may be possible to include effects such as operation, light emission of a light source such as a lamp, and output of sound from various speakers, or a movable accessory, a lamp, various speakers, etc. may be operated individually. ..

[Producing pattern table when hold is satisfied]
In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the satisfaction time production to be executed by the satisfaction time production random number acquired by the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. In order to determine the type of the above, the above-described hold-satisfying effect pattern table is provided. A plurality of types are stored in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 so that the holding-satisfaction effect pattern that is different depending on the type of the special symbol that is changing and the result of the winning/decision determination is used. These will be described below with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 202(A) is a diagram showing the pattern table of the holding-satisfying effect that is executed when the special symbol in change is the first special symbol and the lottery result is a big hit, and FIG. 202(B) is The special symbol that is changing is the first special symbol, and is a diagram showing a pattern table of the on-holding time effect that is executed when the lottery result is out.
FIG. 203(A) is a diagram showing a pattern table of an effect at the time of holding fulfillment executed when the special symbol in change is the second special symbol and the lottery result is a big hit, and FIG. 203(B) is The special symbol that is changing is the second special symbol, and is a diagram showing a pattern table of the on-holding time effect that is executed when the lottery result is out.

As shown in FIGS. 202 to 203, in this embodiment, there are three types of patterns A, B, and C (one example among many types) for each type of holding-satisfaction effect, and “big hit expectation degree”. , The degree of expectation for the jackpot suggested to the player is different depending on the selected holding satisfaction effect.

To be more specific, if the special symbol that is fluctuating when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied is the first special symbol, the reservation fulfillment from FIG. 202(A) or (B) A pattern of time production is selected. If the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the pattern of the effect on hold satisfaction is selected from FIG. 202(A), and if it is out, it is selected from FIG. 202(B).
In addition, if the special symbol that is fluctuating when the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied is the second special symbol, the production at the time of retention satisfaction from FIG. 203(A) or (B) Pattern is selected. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the pattern of the effect on hold satisfaction is selected from FIG. 203(A), and when it is out, it is selected from FIG. 203(B).

In each pattern table, “high”, “medium”, and “low” are assigned as expectations, and “high” has the highest expectations and “low” has the lowest expectations. It should be noted that this does not indicate the degree of expectation for the actual jackpot, but the degree of expectation suggested to the player in the effect related to the changing special symbol. When the expectation is "high", the expectation for the jackpot is that the text color of the above-mentioned message is different from the color normally displayed, the effect image is displayed around the mini character image, etc. May be suggested to be high.
Further, regarding the distribution of the winning values of the random numbers for the effect at the time of satisfaction, the “selection rate” in the rightmost column of each table corresponds. If the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit when the effect when holding is fulfilled is executed, it is highly probable that a pattern to which the high degree of expectation is assigned will be selected. If the result of the lottery for the special symbol is wrong, the probability that the pattern to which the degree of expectation “low” is assigned is selected is high.

As for the effects 3A to 3C at the time of satisfaction, it does not suggest which special symbol is changing, as described above, and is an effect not involved in winning or losing, regardless of the result of the special symbol being changed. Since it is not executed, "-" is assigned, which does not indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the hold-satisfaction effect 2D that is executed while the first special symbol is changing, “Satisfaction effect 2D” is used, and in the hold-satisfaction effect that is executed when the second special symbol is changing, “Satisfaction effect” 2B" is not executed respectively, so that the effect when holding is satisfied and the special symbol that is actually changing are not contradictory, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful, and It suppresses the decline in the entertainment appeal.

[Limitation of continuous production]
In addition, the effect of holding satisfaction of the present embodiment is executed when the number of holding memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the player confirms the effect of holding satisfaction. By doing so, you can obtain the merit that you can know the current game state and the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol that is changing, so keep playing the game ball positively to satisfy the hold Is possible. However, no matter how much the above-mentioned effect is obtained, when the effect of holding and satisfying the same content is continuously executed, the player eventually becomes tired of the game. In view of this, in order to prevent the user from getting tired of the hold-satisfaction effect, the execution of the same hold-satisfaction effect is restricted.

Specifically, as a holding-satisfaction effect when the lottery result of the changing second special symbol is out, a satisfaction-time effect 1A to 1C and a satisfaction time effect 2A to 2D shown in FIG. 203(B). Of these, it is assumed that the satisfaction effect 2A is executed. In that case, the execution of the satisfaction effect 2A is stored in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the hold storage is satisfied again, and the satisfaction effect 2A is again determined by the determination using the satisfaction effect random number. When it is selected, it matches the stored effect at the time of satisfaction, so that the same effect 2A at the time of last time is restricted not to be executed. Here, as a method of advancing the game progress without performing the same satisfaction time effect, "discard the determination result using the satisfaction time effect random number and execute another satisfaction time effect different from the previous time", or Repeating the acquisition and determination of the random number for satisfaction time until the random number for satisfaction time effect corresponding to the other effects at the time of satisfaction other than the same effect as the previous time is acquired." This point may be considered as one of the limiting conditions described above (third limiting condition).

By the way, depending on the player, when an effect that has been seen before is selected and executed again from among many holding satisfaction effects, even if it is not the effect pattern of the holding satisfaction effect that was selected and executed immediately before, Since it is not possible to feel the freshness of the effect contents, there is a possibility that it may be wondered that there are only a few patterns in the on-hold satisfaction effect, which may reduce the interest in the game. . In order to solve this, in addition to not selectively executing the same pattern as the effect of the hold-satisfaction performed just before, the effect of the hold-satisfaction once selected and executed once is restricted not to be executed again. May be.
In addition, for example, when one of the patterns in the satisfaction effect 1 is executed, a pattern other than the satisfaction effect 1 may be selected as the pending satisfaction effect to be executed next time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the restriction that prevents the same on-hold fulfillment effect from being performed again when the cancellation condition is satisfied is cancelled. The fulfillment of the release condition in the present embodiment refers to the release condition that the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is started in the customer waiting state, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510 is established when the release condition is established. It is supposed to clear the data of the last effect at the time of fulfillment of holding stored in the predetermined storage area.
The fact that the demonstration has been executed means that the game has not been started by the player for a certain period of time, so a player different from the player who has already watched the on-hold-satisfaction effect has already been executed. Since there is a high possibility of starting a game, it is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned factors that reduce the interest in the game.

In addition, the establishment of the release condition is not limited to the customer waiting state described above and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is started, and for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. When a predetermined time has passed since the performance pattern of the selected selection-executed fulfillment effect was executed (for example, 30 minutes), or when the return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card is operated. Alternatively, when the number of times the special symbol changes is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times may be used as a predetermined trigger, and various modes can be selected.

[Story-type on-hold production]
Further, the effect mode of the holding satisfaction time effect executed immediately before and the holding satisfaction time effect executed next may be continuous. For example, description will be made below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating an example of a series of flows in a continuous retention fulfillment effect (hereinafter referred to as a story-type retention fulfillment effect).

Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1911 in the peripheral control board 1510 acquires a random number for satisfaction production when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the acquired satisfaction time is obtained. It is determined whether the random number for effect matches with the winning value classified into each of the plurality of types of on-hold satisfaction effects defined in the on-hold satisfaction effect pattern table, which will be described later, and the determination result is a "story type" not shown. The story-type on-sufficiency effect is executed based on the fact that it matches the "on-sufficiency effect".
As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and (b), when the special symbols are changing and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. A mini character image simulating a ladybird and a message indicating that the fortune-telling effect will be displayed are displayed at the bottom, and the fortune-telling effect is executed to select one of the four colors of "red", "blue", "yellow", and "green". . The displayed “red”, “blue”, “yellow”, and “green” are sequentially displayed brightly, and when the operation button 410 is operated, the color shown in the brightly displayed portion is selected. . It should be noted that the effect of fortune telling is not shown in the hold-satisfaction effect (first half of the story-type hold-satisfaction effect) executed at this point.
Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

Next, it is stored in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 that the first half of the story-type on-hold fulfillment effect has been executed, and then, when the on-hold storage is satisfied again, the stored story-type fulfillment is stored. The latter half of the story-type satisfying time production, which is a continuation of the first half of the time production, is executed. As shown in FIGS. 204 (d) to (e), when the special symbols are fluctuating and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, the right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the bottom, a message and an image showing the mini-character image simulating a ladybird, the continuation of the story-type on-hold fulfillment effect that was executed immediately before, and the color selected by the player are displayed, and "red""blue"" The fortunes of each of the four colors, yellow and green, are displayed (the latter half of the story-type on-hold fulfillment production).
Next, the mini-character image and the message are hidden, the variation of the effect design is stopped according to the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the story-type hold-satisfaction effect performed over a plurality of changes in the special symbols, the player is one of the series of effect modes in one hold-satisfaction effect. Since you can only see a part (the first half of story-type on-hold fulfillment production), you can improve the enjoyment of the game and re-hold on-hold memory again by arousing your interest in the latter half of the story-type on-hold fulfillment production. It is possible to continue hitting a game ball in order to satisfy it.

The result of the fortune-telling effect in the story-type on-hold satisfying effect may be associated with the color and the fortune at the time of starting the effect, but in addition, there is a high expectation for the jackpot and a special symbol that is changing. It may be changed according to the lottery result, for example, when "red" is selected by the player, the lucky result in the fortune-telling performance is good despite the fact that the lottery result of the changing special symbol is missed. When "Daikichi" indicating "is displayed, the displayed fortune and the special symbol lottery result do not balance with each other, which may give a distrust to the player. In order to prevent this, no matter what color is selected by the player, if the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit, "Daikichi" will be displayed and the lottery result of the changing special symbol will be out of the question. For example, "bad" may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a story-type on-hold satisfying effect, an example of an effect mode in which the player's fortune is divinated is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of special symbols may be associated with each other. Various modes can be selected as long as the effect is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the holding-satisfaction effect is executed over the change of the special symbol twice, but it may be executed over the change of the special symbol of three times or more.

In addition, when performing a story-type on-hold fulfillment effect, a player leaves the seat before the series of stories are all executed, and then another player starts playing, If there is a situation in which the player is vacant for a long time, even if you execute the production that is the continuation of the story-type on-hold fulfillment production, there is a long time or a player who does not know the relationship with the previously executed story. A player or the like who has forgotten because of the mistake may not be able to enjoy the performance mode, so in the present embodiment, even before the series of stories are all executed, there is a predetermined trigger. It is configured so that the story production that follows is not performed. The predetermined trigger in the present embodiment is a release condition that the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is started in the customer waiting state, and the predetermined condition of the peripheral control board 1510 when the release condition is satisfied. It is supposed to clear the data of the previous story-type on-hold fulfillment effect data stored in the memory area. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned factors that reduce the fun of the game.

The predetermined trigger is not limited to the period in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state described above. For example, the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Time, when a predetermined time has passed since the performance pattern of the selected selection-executed hold satisfaction effect was executed (for example, 30 minutes), or when the return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card was operated, The predetermined story may be satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times or more, and when the release condition is satisfied, the previous story-type hold reservation stored in the predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is satisfied. It is designed to clear the time-staging data.

By the way, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and when the effect of holding-satisfaction is selected and executed, the remaining time of the change of the special symbol being executed, the operating condition of the movable accessory, etc. Is the change of the special symbol is finished before the end of the holding satisfaction effect, or while the performance of the movable accessory is running, the holding satisfaction effect of driving the movable accessory is It may be selected, and the movable accessory may not be appropriately driven. In order to prevent this, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, when the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, information regarding the variation time, information regarding the variation pattern, etc. With reference to, when the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed at that time, the operating state of the movable winning combination, etc., are selectively executed. The contents of the production when the hold is satisfied are different.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol will be described separately for the first half of the variation, the second half of the variation, and immediately before the end of the variation. As an example, if the total variation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds, 9 seconds from the start of the variation will be described as the first half of the variation, the subsequent 9 seconds will be the second half of the variation, and the remaining 2 seconds will be just before the variation ends. It is an example, and is not limiting in any way. Details will be described below with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an executable effect on hold fulfillment and an executable effect on hold satisfaction that is not executed depending on the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation. “O” indicates that it can be executed, and “x” indicates that it cannot be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 205, the first half variation of non-working items is a state in which the movable accessory is not in operation during the production related to the special symbol variation in the first half of variation, while the first half variation is operating, the special symbol variation in the first half of variation. The state that the movable accessory is operating during the production related to, the latter half of the variation is not operating, the state where the movable accessory is not operating during the production related to the special symbol variation in the latter half of the variation, the latter half of the variation is operating. Is a state in which the movable accessory is operating during the production related to the special symbol change in the latter half of the change, immediately before the end of the change, immediately before the change of the special symbol ends, regardless of whether the movable accessory is in operation or not. The state (for example, 2 seconds ago) is shown, and the above state is assigned to each of the holding satisfaction effects.

As shown in FIG. 205, "satisfaction effect 1", "satisfaction effect 2", and "satisfaction effect 3" are executed regardless of whether the movable accessory is in operation or not, and immediately before the end of fluctuation. Only if it's not supposed to run.

The above-mentioned state is defined as the "holding satisfaction effect (sound/lamp)" in which the peripheral controller 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect of outputting sound from various speakers or causing a light-emitting body such as a lamp to emit light. Even in the case of, it can be executed regardless of, and may be executed at the same time as the other effect at the time of holding satisfaction.

The "holding satisfaction effect (movable accessory)" in which the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect of operating the movable accessory is the first half of the change or the second half of the change, and the movable accessory is driven by another effect. It can be executed when it is not in operation, and may be executed at the same time as other effects when the hold is satisfied.

The "holding satisfaction time effect (holding change)" in which the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 changes the holding image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be executed only in the state immediately before the end of the fluctuation. There is. This is to preferentially execute the above-mentioned effects 1 to 3 in the first half of the fluctuation and the latter half of the fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol has a margin.

As described above, as in the present embodiment, the holding-satisfaction effect that is selectively executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 according to the fluctuation remaining time of the changing special symbol and the operating condition of the movable accessory can be made different. Depending on, the fluctuation of the special symbol ends before the holding satisfaction production ends, or the driving of the movable accessory related to the special symbol fluctuation and the operation of the movable accessory related to the retention satisfaction effect overlap. It is possible to prevent the situation that it ends up.

[Delivery before holding]
In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the hold-satisfaction time effect executed when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. A pre-holding fulfillment effect that is executed when a predetermined number of holding storages is achieved in a state where the number is not satisfied is performed. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 206 is a diagram illustrating an example of a series of flows in an effect including a pre-holding fulfillment effect that is executed immediately before the holding memory is filled, that is, when seven holding memories are accumulated.

As shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b), when the special symbols are changing, just before the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, seven reserved memories When is accumulated, a mini-character image simulating a ladybird appears in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, a predetermined message indicating that the hold is soon to be satisfied is displayed (holding pre-filling effect). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 acquires a random number for satisfaction production when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes 7, and the acquired satisfaction is acquired. It is determined whether the random number for time performance matches which of the winning values divided into each of the plurality of types of hold satisfaction time effects defined in the hold satisfaction effect pattern table, and the determination result is “not shown” before hold satisfaction. The pre-sufficiency effect is executed based on the fact that the winning value of the effect matches.
Then, as shown in FIG. 206(c), when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, a mini-character image imitating a ladybird appears in the lower right part of the game board side effect display device 1600, At the same time, a message is displayed. As an example, this time, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the random number for satisfaction time effect is acquired, and the obtained random number for satisfaction effect time is the reserved effect time effect pattern table. It is determined which of the winning values is classified into each of the plurality of types of the hold-satisfaction effects specified in 1., and when the satisfaction is determined based on the result of the determination matching with the "winning value of the satisfaction effect 1B". Performance 1B is being executed.
In addition, at the same time as the mini-character image and the message, for example, an effect image is displayed around the mini-character image and a "holding-satisfaction effect (holding change)" is executed.
Then, the variation of the effect design is stopped in accordance with the determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As described above, when the reserved storage is satisfied by performing the production as a trigger before the number of the reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 7, which is the stage before the reserved storage is satisfied. It is possible to keep hitting the game ball by making it aware that it is only one step until the performance at the time of holding satisfaction executed is executed, and there is some advantage for the player by filling the holding memory. Since it is a production that makes me think that there is something that will be, it is possible to increase the interest in the game at the same time.

It should be noted that, as described above, the explanation is given of performing the pre-holding fulfillment effect when the number of holding memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes 7, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the holding memory is sufficient. If the state is other than the above state (the number of stored memories is 1 to 7), the pre-holding effect may be performed at any time.

[Demonstration when hold is reduced]
In addition, in the present embodiment, after the retention-satisfaction effect is executed which is executed when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation is started. The hold-reducing time effect is executed when the number of hold memories stored by is decreased. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating an example of a series of flows in an effect including an effect during a hold decrease time, which is executed when the predetermined number of hold memories decreases from the state where the hold memories are filled.

207(a)-(b) When the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sufficient, a mini character image simulating a ladybird appears in the lower right portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, a message is also displayed. The displayed effect at the time of reservation satisfaction is executed. Here, as an example, a random number for satisfaction production is acquired when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the obtained random number for production effect of satisfaction is the retention time production pattern table. It is determined which of the winning values classified into each of the plurality of types of hold-satisfaction effects specified in stipulates, and when the determination result matches the “winning value of the satisfaction-time effect 2A” Performance 2A is being executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 207(c), the variation of the effect design is stopped in accordance with the determined variation pattern, and the winning/winning result is derived and displayed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 207(d), the ladybug is placed in the lower right portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 with the decrease in the reserved memory that was satisfied when the next special symbol variation is started. The imitated mini-character image appears, and at the same time, a message prompting you to satisfy the hold again is displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 is triggered by the fact that the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 7 (reduced) from being satisfied. Acquires the random number for satisfaction time production, and which of the winning values the acquired random numbers for satisfaction time effect are classified into each of the plurality of types of held satisfaction time effect specified in the pending satisfaction time effect pattern table. The determination is made, and the determination result is executed based on the fact that it matches an unillustrated "winning value of effect during hold reduction".
Then, as shown in FIG. 207(e), when the hold storage is filled again, a mini character image simulating a ladybird appears in the lower right portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a message is also displayed at the same time. Time performance is executed. Here, as an example, a random number for satisfaction production is acquired when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and the obtained random number for production effect of satisfaction is the retention time production pattern table. It is determined which of the winning values classified into each of the plurality of types of hold-satisfaction effects specified in stipulates, and when the determination result matches the "winning value of the satisfaction-time effect 1C". Performance 1C is being executed.
The variation of the effect design is stopped according to the finally determined variation pattern, and the winning result is derived and displayed.

As described above, by executing the effect at the time of holding-satisfaction when the held storage that has been filled is reduced, for example, when the holding storage is filled, the player's hitting of the game ball has stopped. Even so, by urging the holding memory to be filled again, it is possible to start hitting the game ball again, and there is something that may be beneficial to the player when the holding is filled again. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by wondering if there is one.

In addition, in both the pre-holding fulfillment effect and the hold reduction time effect, the effect of urging the player to hit the game ball is executed so that the holding memory is satisfied, and therefore, the message having common contents is used. May be displayed. In this case, similarly to the hold-satisfaction effect, when the effect mode having the same content is continuously executed, the player eventually gets tired. In order to suppress this, execution of the same production mode (same message) is restricted.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the effect on hold satisfaction, the effect before hold satisfaction and the effect on hold decrease are described as being performed using the distribution winning opening unit 2150, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to use a general starting port known from the above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention may be applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the present embodiment.

1 Pachinko Machine 2 Outer Frame 3 Door Frame 4 Main Frame 5 Game Board 5a Game Area 6 CR Unit 10 Upper Frame Member 11 Engagement Notch 12 Mounting Step 20 Lower Frame Member 21 Engagement Notch 22 Front End Notch 30 Left Frame Member 31 Recessed portion 32 Protruded portion 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed portion 42 Protruded portion 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extended portion 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall portion 55 Return portion 56 Left mounting portion 57 Right mounting portion 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operating part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising portion 73 Lower hinge pin for outer frame 74 Discharge hole
80 curtain plate reinforcing member 81 left sliding member 82 right sliding member 85 connecting member 85A upper left connecting member 85B upper right connecting member 85C lower left connecting member 85D lower right connecting member 86 horizontal fixing portion 87 upper lateral fixing portion 88 lower lateral fixing portion 89 bent portion 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide vane 96 Guide vane 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through hole 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting portion 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Passage hole for lower tray 117 Passage for Upper Plate 118 Glass Unit Attachment 119 Speaker Insertion 130 130 Reinforcement Unit 131 Upper Reinforcing Sheet Metal 132 Middle Reinforcing Sheet Metal 132a Notch 133 Left Reinforcing Sheet Metal 134 Right Reinforcing Sheet Metal 135 Locking Locking Part 140 Door Frame Side Upper Hinge Member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Projecting piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Collar member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative substrate 161 Door frame on the left side decoration board 161a LED
162 Door frame Lower left side decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass Unit Mounting Member 171 Base Part 172 Projection Part 180 Handle Mounting Member 181 Cylindrical Part 182 Flange Part 183 Projection 184 Reinforcing Rib 190 Glass Unit 191 Glass Frame 191a Mounting Piece 191b Locking Piece 192 Glass Plate 194 Frame Decorative Amplifier Board 194a +9V Creating circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear projection 203 Locking piece 210 Opening/closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmitting member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting metal 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Inlet 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Hitting ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball removing member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod 253c Operating rod 253d Weight blocking member 254 Ball feed 254 Holding portion 254c Rod portion 255 Ball feeding solenoid 256 Ball feeding operating rod 257 Ball feeding crank 257a Engagement portion 257b Shaft portion 257c Transmission portion 260 Tamper proof member 261 Upper piece portion 262 Lower piece portion 263 Inclination portion 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit body 272 Cover member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Fal ball receiving port 276 Ball discharging port 277 Storage passage 278 Moving piece 279 Full tank detecting sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening/closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base part 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Slit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single button 312 Single button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage part 321b Ground metal plate 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Escape part 322c Sphere guide part (guide means)
322d Buffer unit (guide means)
322e Return part (guide means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guideway 323f Ball removal guideway 323g Opening part 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Body part 325B First expansion part 325C Second expansion part 325a Bottom Wall 325b Main body standing wall 326 Dish unit cover (cover)
326a Performance operation unit mounting portion (covering portion)
326b Plate front upper decorative part 326c Plate front lower decorative part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharging operation part)
327a Operation transmission part 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball lending button 329 Return button 330 Ball lending/returning display part 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Bottom dish ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Bottom dish ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall 340b Ceiling part 365 Degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate first area A2 Lower plate second area PL Split line 400 Rendering operation unit (Coating part)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a First button decoration 411b Second button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame main 416a Central Opening 416b Peripheral opening 416c Cutout 416d Inner tube 416e Mounting 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decorative board 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 operation button right outside decorative substrate 423a first LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432e Attachment button 4 Inner decoration 423g Second button Inner decoration 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens Decorative board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg section 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body section 451b Cover section 451c Through hole 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing section 451f Lower bearing section 451g Rotation restriction section 452 Button shaft 454 Press detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Operating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detecting piece 476 Sub-screen decoration member 477 Sub-screen decoration substrate 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recessed portion 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotational drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens unit 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second effect operation relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Aperture 532 Left unit Diffusing lens member 532A Upper diffusing lens member 532B Lower diffusing lens member 532a Circular lens part 532b Square lens part 532c Central diffuse reflecting part 532d Front diffusing lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflecting part 534 Left unit decorative base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative substrate 552A Door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552B Door frame right side Lower decorative substrate 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
553 right unit left diffusion lens member 553a main body portion 553b rear wall portion 553c notch portion 553d accommodation recess 553e input lens portion 553f side reflection portion 554 right unit left decorative member 555 right unit left cover 556 right unit right diffusion lens member 556a main body portion 556b Rear wall portion 556c Cutout portion 556d Housing concave portion 556e Input lens portion 556f Side reflection portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 558 Right unit right cover 559 right unit left light shielding member 559a main body portion 559b rear wall portion 559c cutout portion 559d reinforcing portion 560 right unit Right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-faceted decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Central base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening portion 574b Slit 574c Top opening 574d Bottom opening 574e Top left decoration 574f Top right decoration 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decoration member 577 Door frame Top middle decoration board 578 Light guide member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Diffusion reflection part Input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame Top left decorative substrate 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top Middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 Door frame top Middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Central axis (of operation button 410)
600 main body frame base 601 game board insertion opening 602 game board mounting portion 603 game board restriction portion 604 launching device mounting portion 605 cylinder insertion opening 606 connection opening portion 607 speaker opening portion 608 rear extension portion 609 upper hinge mounting portion 610 Lower hinge attachment part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Body frame opening switch 620 Body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge body 622 Body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Control piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launching device 681 Launching base 682 Launching solenoid 683 Hitting mallet 684 Launching rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hook 703 Outer frame hook 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Dispensing unit 801 Dispensing unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guiding unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guiding inlet 821b Ball Guide outlet 821c Guide passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detecting part 821f Meandering part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guide inlet 822b Ball guide outlet 822c Guide passage 822d Introducing part 822e Detecting part 822f Meandering part 823 Cutout part 822g Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extending portion 825d Connecting portion 825e Weight attaching portion 825f Detecting piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extending portion 826d Fie attaching portion 826e Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball breakage detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge entrance 831b Discharge exit 831c Ball discharge exit 831d Discharge passage 831e Ball discharge passage 831f Guide shelf 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box exit 832a Discharge 832a Ball outlet 832d Delivery passage 832e Ball passage 832f Guide shelf 832g Lever mounting part 833 Front Cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detecting piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base tube part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Ball rotating part 839e Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Discharge detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Main body 843b Shaft cylinder 843c Projection 843d Weight attachment 844 Ball removal lever 850 Top full ball path unit 850a Top delivery ball receiving 850b Top ball removal 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition 850g Upper ball discharge passage 850h Upper ball discharge outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharging device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED indicator 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 861 Normal taxiway 862 Full tank taxiway 863 Taxiway opening/closing door 863a Base part 863b First door plate part 863c Second door plate part 863d Extending part 863e Operation Protrusion 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball removing guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss portion 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening/closing door 870a Base part 870b First door plate part 870c No. Two door plate parts 870d Recessed part 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power board 935 power supply control unit 935a synchronous rectification circuit 935b power factor improvement circuit 935c smoothing circuit 935d power supply creation circuit 940 interface control board box 950 payout control board box 951 payout control board 951a payout control filter circuit 952 payout control unit 952a payout control MPU
952b Discharge control input circuit 952c Discharge control output circuit 952d Discharge motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input/output circuit 953 Fire control section 953a Fire control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step portion 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step portion 1122 Through hole 1123 Projecting pin 1124 Engaging claw 1125 Engaging piece 1126 Out port 1127 Cutout portion 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Inserting hole 1150 Game panel (second embodiment) )
1151 Out port 1152 Notched part 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part

1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa main control CPU core 1310ae main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea transmission shift register 1310aeb transmission buffer register 1310aec serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb No reset function Main control output circuit 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g +5V generation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round display Unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b +3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa peripheral control CPU core 1511ab peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control Bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A/D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b Liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side effect
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device (first effect display means)
1600a liquid crystal module 1600b backlight power supply 1601 left fixing piece 1602 right fixing piece 2000 table unit 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate section 2004 second starting opening 2005 large winning opening 2100 starting opening unit 2101 unit base 2102 ball receiving 2103 Front decoration base member 2104 Front center decoration substrate 2105 Front decoration member 2105a Fake part 2106 Induction passage member 2107 Starting solenoid 2108 Attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit lower 2300 Side unit upper 2500 Center member 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixing groove 3010d Notch part 3010e Fixing piece part 3042 Production drive board box 3050 Back left middle decoration unit 3100 Back lower rear movable effect unit 3200 Back upper left movable effect unit 3300 Back left movable effect unit 3400 Back upper middle movable effect unit 3500 Back lower front movable effect unit 4002 First starting opening sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second starting opening sensor 4005 Count sensor 4020 General winning opening sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

4450 production display drive substrate 4450v liquid crystal module circuit 4450x door frame side production module power supply circuit 4450y door frame side production module backlight power supply circuit

MGS magnetic sensor STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

A plurality of abnormality detection sensor units arranged on the game board,
Before SL abnormality detection sensor unit are connected by a connector member, in the gaming machine provided with a relay board that transmits a signal from the abnormality detection sensor unit to the main control board,
The relay board includes a sensor signal input section and a detection circuit section,
The sensor signal input unit includes a voltage output unit and a voltage raising unit formed of a resistance element without using a Zener diode connected to the voltage output unit,
A plurality of the sensor signal input units are electrically connected to the detection circuit unit,
The voltage output unit outputs a first voltage when the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a voltage lower than the first voltage when the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output a second voltage that is
The detection circuit unit, switching on and off of the output of the detection signal in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit,
The abnormality detection sensor unit and the voltage output unit of the sensor signal input unit are electrically connected via the connector member,
The voltage raising unit is also low at constant-pressure than higher the first voltage than said second voltage due to contact resistance is applied to occur to the connector member, said with respect to the sense circuit unit to avoid effects of Tokoro constant-voltage, which is avoided action by the predetermined voltage so that a drop-in replacement should not be cut output of the detection signal of the detection circuit unit,
The detection circuit unit,
When the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the first state, the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the first voltage to turn on the output of the detection signal,
When the abnormality detection sensor unit is in the second state, the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the second voltage that is lower than the first voltage, and the detection signal is output. Off,
The voltage output portion due to contact resistance generated the connector member, even when outputting the plant constant-voltage lower than the high of the first voltage than the second voltage, said detection signal Turn off the output of
When the connector member connected to the abnormality detection sensor unit is broken, and the voltage output from the voltage output unit is set to the first voltage and the output of the detection signal is turned on, the notification means causes the game. A gaming machine characterized by giving a notification on an effect display device provided on a board.

Images